JP2020036699A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest of a game due to a failure variation.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of playing a game includes game control means for controlling progress of a game and performance execution means capable of executing a performance. The game control means performs a variable display, and can control a state to a special state (e.g., a small winning game state) in which a game value (e.g., a prize ball) can be imparted when a special display result (e.g., a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The performance execution means can execute a corresponding performance (e.g., a performance including a decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display and display a special display relating to the special state (e.g., a combination of decorative symbol indicating a small winning). The rate at which a corresponding performance is executed is lower in the variable display (e.g., a failure variation) that does not correspond to the special display result than that in the variable display (e.g., a small winning variation) that corresponds to the special display result.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launch device, and when a game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one that is configured. Further, variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value is provided. Is provided to a player (a so-called pachinko gaming machine).

The prize value means paying out a prize ball, giving a score, or giving a prize in accordance with a prize of a game ball in a prize area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes a state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win a hit ball, That is, a right to be in an advantageous state is generated, or a condition for paying out a prize ball is easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of a special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on a game ball winning the starting winning opening. In this case, a "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the state shifts to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is won, the winning prize is closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 10 rounds).
An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and if the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, a specific display mode determined in advance as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning prize port. In some cases, a "small hit (special state)" is generated when the display is derived. When a small hit occurs, for example, the special prize mouth is opened, and the state shifts to a small hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, when the opening time has elapsed, the special winning opening is closed.

In such a gaming machine, if the winning probability of a small hit is reduced to 1/3, or if the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times without being a big hit in a high probability non-time shortening state, It is disclosed that the high-probability non-time shortening state ends (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-176585 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, if the player can easily recognize the variable display that is not controlled to the special state, the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest of a game in a variable display that is not controlled to a special state.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of performing a game), and the game progresses. A game control means for controlling (for example, a part for executing the steps S120 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6) and an effect executing means for executing an effect (for example, Effect control CPU 120), the game control means performs variable display, and when a special display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a game value (for example, a prize ball) is displayed. It can be controlled to a special state that can be given (for example, a small hitting game state) (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6). Step S126~S128 are the portions for performing),
The effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, an effect including the decorative pattern 015SH10 shown in FIG. 11-4 (E)) (executes step S171 in the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 8). Part), and a special display relating to the special state (for example, FIG.
It is possible to display a decorative pattern "1, 3, 5" indicating a small hit shown in 1-4 (F) (for example, step 015SHS108 in effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 11-2).
Is performed, and the variable display (for example, out-of-position variation) that does not correspond to the special display result is performed (for example, step 015 in the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 11B).
SHS105: YES → step 015SHS106 → step 015SHS107), rather than the variable display (for example, small hit variation) corresponding to the special display result (for example, step 015SHS105 in the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 11B).
: NO → step 015SHS108 is executed), the ratio of executing the corresponding effect is low (for example, step 015S in effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 11B).
HS105: If YES, step 015SHS108 is not executed. FIG. 11-6 (
In the loss variation shown in M), the effect using the decorative symbol 015SH10 executed in the small hit variation shown in FIG. ).
This makes it difficult to perform a corresponding effect (effect including a decorative symbol) in a variable display (for example, a change in a loss) that does not correspond to the special display result. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the change is a loss change. For this reason, even if a deviation change intervenes between the small hit fluctuation and the small hit fluctuation executed thereafter, it is as if the small hit fluctuation was continuously performed (every change, the small hit is won). As if).
Thereby, even if the winning probability of the small hit is not high (for example, the small hitting probability shown in FIG. 11A:
48%), a light game (a good-tempo, comfortable game) can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a change in the outlier. This allows
From the player's point of view, it seems that small hits have occurred more than they actually are, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling stress due to a change in the loss. Further, since the winning probability of small hits can be suppressed, the base value can be prevented from rising too much without reducing the number of prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the gambling property from being excessively high, and to realize a healthy game.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the game control means includes identification information (for example, a special symbol).
In the variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103 shown in FIG. 4) shown in FIG.
25A and S25B), and the variable display executing means performs variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol) in parallel. (For example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 4), and the game control means performs variable display. The special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is likely to be given by the special state (for example, the small hitting game state).
(For example, a portion that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) illustrated in FIG. 6).
Thereby, in the second KT state (during the small hit rush), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the change is a loss change. For this reason, in the second KT state, even if a deviation change intervenes between the small hit fluctuation and the small hit fluctuation executed thereafter, it can be seen as if the small hit fluctuation has been continuously performed. Thereby, even if the winning probability of the small hit is not high (for example, the small hitting probability shown in FIG. 11A: 48%), a light game (a good tempo and a pleasant game) in the second KT state is realized. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a loss change in the second KT state. Further, since the winning probability of the small hit can be suppressed, the base value in the second KT state can be prevented from excessively increasing.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the effect executing means corresponds to a variable display of the identification information (special symbol), and the decoration identification information (for example, FIG. 11-4 ( The decorative design 015SH10 shown in E) can be variably displayed (for example, a part of the effect control CPU 120 which executes step S171 shown in FIG. 8) regardless of whether the special state is controlled or not. However, corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, reduced decoration identification information different from the variable display of the decoration identification information (for example, the second small symbol 0 shown in FIG.
15SH12) can be executed (even in the small hit variation shown in FIG.
The second small symbol 015SH12 can be displayed even if the variation is -6 (M)).
Thereby, even when the variation display by the decorative symbol is not performed in the loss variation, the small symbol can be variably displayed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. Therefore, small design (
The player can always grasp the fluctuation state of the special symbol).

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the effect executing means may perform the corresponding effect (variable display) on a variable display (losing variation) not corresponding to the special display result.
A specific effect (effect including the decorative design 015SH10 shown in FIG. 11-4 (E)) (FIG. 1)
It is possible to execute the specific effect 015SH31a shown in 1-6 (M) (for example, a portion for executing step 015SHS106 in the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 11B).
As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the variation has occurred due to the specific effect. In addition, the specific effect executed in the out-of-place fluctuation may be an effect indicating that there is a possibility that a small hit game may be performed thereafter. Therefore, even if a deviation change intervenes between the small hit change and the small hit change executed thereafter, it can be seen as if the small hit change was continuously performed. Thereby, even if the winning probability of the small hit is not high (for example, the small hitting probability shown in FIG. 11A: 48%), a light game (a game with a good tempo) can be realized. In addition, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a loss change.

(5) In the gaming machine described in the above (4), a holding storage means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, shown in FIG. 5) shown in FIG. 5 for storing information relating to variable display as holding storage information (holding storage). Is the part that executes step S101A in the CPU 103) and the special state (for example, the small hitting game state) for the variable display that has not been started yet.
(For example, a portion for executing step S101A in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 5) which determines whether or not the control is performed. The execution means includes a variable display that does not correspond to the special display result (
In the out-of-place variation), based on the fact that the holding storage means contains the holding storage information (small hit holding) which becomes the special state (for example, using the look-ahead specific effect setting table shown in FIG. 11-10). , The specific effect (for example, the specific effect 0 shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A) to (D))
15SH31a, 015SH31b) can be executed.
In this way, it is possible to execute the specific effect of the content according to whether or not the small hit holding is stored in the out-of-office display. For example, a specific performance performed in the outfall fluctuation,
Thereafter, an effect (fixed effect) indicating that the small hitting game is performed may be provided. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect can be improved. In addition, by preparing a plurality of look-ahead specific effects having different degrees of expectation for the small hit game, in the case of continuous loss fluctuations, as the start of the small hit holding fluctuation display approaches, the expectation for the small hit game is gradually increased. A high level of performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can gradually increase the sense of expectation for the small hit game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), the effect executing means may correspond to a variable display of the identification information (special symbol), and the decoration identification information (for example, FIG.
-4SH (E) can be variably displayed (for example, a portion of step S171 in the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 8) which does not correspond to the special display result. , The variable display of the decoration identification information can be made non-display (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 11-6 (M) to (P)).
As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the deviation has occurred. For this reason, even if a deviation change intervenes between the small hit fluctuation and the small hit fluctuation executed thereafter, it can be seen as if the small hit fluctuation has been continuously performed.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6), a passable state (
A variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 17 and a special winning opening shown in FIG. 1) that can be changed between an open state and a difficult passage state (closed state) is provided. State), the effect execution means can be changed to a special display (for example, the special display 015SH in FIG. 11-5 (H)) in response to the game medium passing through the variable means.
22a) can be displayed, and a predetermined display similar to the special display (for example, the effect image 015SH21a of FIG. 11-5 (G)) is displayed in response to the control of the special state, and the game medium is changed to the variable means. The special display is displayed by displaying a specific display (for example, the image showing +10 corresponding to the number of payouts in FIG. 11-5 (G)) in the display area of the predetermined display in response to passing through the predetermined display.
Thus, in the small hit game, the effect can be lively regardless of the presence or absence of a prize in the special winning opening. For this reason, by performing the predetermined display, even if there is no winning in the special winning opening, it is possible to make it less noticeable that there is no winning in the special winning opening. Therefore, the player's disappointment when there is no winning in the special winning opening can be reduced. Thus, the predetermined display can suppress a decrease in interest in the small hit game. In addition, when there is a winning in the special winning opening, the number of payouts can be notified by performing a special display, so that the player can be satisfied. Therefore, the special display can enhance the interest in the small hit game. Further, according to the characteristic portion 015SH, it is possible to suppress the winning probability of a small hit, so that the number of award balls can be increased (for example, increased to 15). By increasing the number of prize balls, a specific display having an impact can be provided. Specifically, the payout number corresponding image can be an image indicating “+15”. Therefore, the interest in the small hit game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory control process process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing a production mode of a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a production mode of a setting suggestion effect. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting change flag is set at power-on. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning prize ball apparatus in the characteristic part 044IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 044IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable winning prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory control normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during opening of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to change a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory pre-opening process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows a waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows a waiting process per special figure. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of a set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display mode of right-handed notification. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed. 15 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol change process in a first modification. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol change process in Modification 1. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of another special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification Example 1. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a first special symbol variation process in a modification 2. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a second special symbol variation process in Modification Example 2. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of another special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol change process in Modification 3. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of another special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification Example 3. 15 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol change process in Modification 4. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol change process in Modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol is performed in the characteristic part 015SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in the characteristic part 015SH. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a specific effect setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of transition of the effect screen in the characteristic part 015SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of transition of the effect screen in the characteristic part 015SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of transition of the effect screen in the characteristic part 015SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of transition of the effect screen in the characteristic part 015SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of transition of the effect screen in the characteristic part 015SH. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a transition of an effect screen of a specific look-ahead effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a prefetch specific effect setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example when performing a setting value suggestion effect in a specific effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table used during the small hit rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the screen at the time of raising a pseudo specific effect in small hit fluctuation.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. First to do
A special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is a number indicating "0" to "9" or "
− ”And the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed indicator 26 for urging a right-handed operation of performing a firing operation aiming at the right of the game area. I have. The right-handed indicator 26 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and is controlled to be turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
A variable display of a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, “
The decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" (for example, scrolling display in a vertical direction or updating display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended is provided. In this example, a first hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and a second hold display for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure An area 5B is provided. Note that a display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-turn notification LED 37 for prompting a right-turn operation is provided. Note that the right-turned notification LED 37 is controlled to be turned on by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold display 25 including a plurality of LEDs is provided.
A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number by the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays by the number of LEDs lit. The second reserved storage number is displayed.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back of the game board 2 and the first starting switch 2
Detected by 2A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting winning opening, so that game balls flowing down from the right side of the gaming area do not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Have been.
As described above, the row 19 of nails for preventing the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the operation of firing the game balls aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). Only when the player has operated the game ball, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning port.

Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the gaming balls are configured to be able to win in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails. It is not limited. For example, the first starting winning opening may be provided on the left side of the game area so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when a left hit operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be provided. A mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area and a row of nails 19 may also be provided so that a game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when a left hit operation is performed.

On the right side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down, in the front-rear direction,
An open state (also referred to as an open state) in which game balls can be won at a large winning opening located below the bottom member is changed to a closed state in which game balls cannot be won (also referred to as a closed state). Special variable winning ball device 7
Moves the bottom member forward in the big hit game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Open control is performed to move the bottom member backward from the closed state so as to open the large winning opening that is a winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 for forming a special winning port for small hits, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port. As shown in the figure, a special variable prize ball device 17 is disposed on the left side, and a variable prize ball device 6B is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B
Extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and is positioned below the bottom member by moving the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-rear direction. An open state (also called an open state) in which game balls can be won in the special winning opening or the second start winning opening is changed to a closed state (also called a closed state) in which game balls cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 17
In the small hitting game state that occurs when the predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward and forward. Open control is performed to move the bottom member backward from the closed state to open the special winning opening that is a winning area. In addition, the variable winning ball device 6B has a normal symbol display 2
When the symbol hits 0 and the symbol is derived and displayed, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the second start winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. Execute release control.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6
B is formed to have a similar structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from upper left to lower right, so that the game balls dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable prize ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable prize ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable prize ball device 6B thereunder.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from upper right to lower left, so that the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 17 and the variable prize ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, so that the special variable prize ball device 7 can be placed on the variable prize ball device 6B without winning. When the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is open, the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening, and the special variable winning ball is dropped. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom surface member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls as it is toward the out opening.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulating pieces for reducing the flowing speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom member. I have. In this example, the special variable prize ball device 7, the special variable prize ball device 17, and the variable prize ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow to flow is delayed more than when there is no regulating piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 17 is disposed on the left side and the variable prize ball device 6B is disposed on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to be gently inclined from upper right to lower left, and when the bottom member is not receded and is in a closed state, the special variable winning ball device is changed from the variable winning ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable prize ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable prize ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side in this sense because the game ball is configured to flow toward the 17th. It can be said that.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened,
This is an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the gaming ball into the special winning opening and obtain a prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

In the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, although the number of prize balls is smaller than when the gaming ball has won the large winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) another prize port, such as the first start prize port 1 or the second start prize port. Therefore, if the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning port is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the game ball to the special winning port to obtain the prize ball, and therefore, for the player, You will be at a disadvantage.

In the second start winning opening, a second starting switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball winning in the second start winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, and during a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area by a firing operation (a so-called right-hit operation). )I do.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the normal symbols is changed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, and thus the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game state shifts to the big hit game state based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, so that the passing gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays both roles of the normal starting area and the operating area.

On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.
Are provided, and a frame LED 9 for a game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). )
A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (a so-called left-handing operation) aiming at the left of the game area. Pachinko machine 1
When the player performs a left-handing operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the game ball into the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display device 4A causes the game ball to enter. One special map game is started.

Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ", the actual design differs depending on the type of jackpot described below. ) Is displayed as "big hit". If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained. Note that, even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be "small hit".

After the display result in the first special map game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes a timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing of the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaching a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, the opening mode of the special winning opening (
A number of rounds and open upper limit period) and a number of game states (normal state, probable change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state are prepared, and the big hit type is set accordingly. Have been. As a big hit type, a big hit type that can get many prize balls,
A jackpot type with few or almost no prize balls may be provided.

After the big hitting game state ends, the state may be controlled to a certain change state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

In the KT state, KT control is performed, which is more likely to cause a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, so that less prize balls can be obtained than in the big hitting game state, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, a control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure change time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is executed (hour saving state), and the general figure game is described as "per-figure hit". For example, by increasing the probability that the game ball becomes higher than the normal state, a control (high opening control, high base control) that allows the game ball to easily enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The high base state is a special design (especially
This is an advantageous state for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol) is improved.

The probable change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. I do. A condition in which the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games is an end condition is also referred to as a frequency cut (such as a frequency cut probability change).

The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probable change state, a KT state, a high base state, and the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when a predetermined reset process is not performed after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). It is in a state where it is done.

When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, KT state, or high base state,
It is advantageous that the player performs a firing operation (right-hand operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handing operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol display device 20 starts the ordinary figure game. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”.
Becomes When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ", the actual design differs depending on the type of jackpot described below. ) Is displayed as "big hit" when the stop display is performed, and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "small hit" is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

After the display result in the second special map game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special map game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed).

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. In addition,
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the frame LED 9
May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol )
Is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, “7”) are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state is ended, the probable change state is set. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (eg, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C,
A decorative symbol forming a chance eye is stopped and displayed on a predetermined activated line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" Alternatively, a common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative design variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition,
Various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
Etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A).
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10
4 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, the ROM 10
The RAM 102 is used as a main memory using various data (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, and data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later) stored in the RAM 1. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). Control (drive) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like.
And an output port for transmitting a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B)) for game ball detection, and count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (For example, a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on), and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, and the solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory and a door for a special winning opening door. The signal is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12 The production control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). ))
And a command for designating the state of the game (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening state of the special winning opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of stored memories, the game state), the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in the memory 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a controller sensor unit 35A and a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute an effect based on a detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character G
an effect ROM, a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and execute an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be performed, based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5.
To be displayed. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal designating the sound to be output) in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-turn notification LED 37. The LED is supplied to the substrate 13, and an LED signal (a signal for designating the ON / OFF state of the LED) is supplied to the LED control substrate 14. The display control unit 12
3 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

The LED control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. The LED control board 14 drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right strike notification LED 37 are turned on / off.
In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on / off of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, control of turning on / off the LED (supply of a sound designation signal, LED signal, and the like), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 includes various random number values (random numbers for production) used to execute various productions.
Numerical data indicating is counted updatable. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, L
And an output port for transmitting an ED signal).

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3).
). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), an initialization process (Step S8) is performed. In the initialization process, C
PU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102 by RA
M clear processing is performed, and an initial value is set in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), the RAM
It is determined whether or not backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, and the like).
In addition, the status of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in No. 02 (Step S4; No), an initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the RAM 10
It is determined that the data of No. 2 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CP
U103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the game state is restored, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 includes:
An appropriate screen display may be performed based on the effect control command.

After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after finishing the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (
Step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) to the CPU 10.
3 and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.
First, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 are executed via the switch circuit 110 by executing a predetermined switch process. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hits) and start information (start information) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Information indicating the number of winnings, etc.)
Then, data such as probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability variation state) is output (step S23).

Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). C
The PU 103 executes the first special symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, so that the execution and suspension management of the first special symbol game and the like are realized (details will be described later). Also, the CPU 103
Executes the second special symbol process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process every time the timer is interrupted, execution of the second special symbol game, management of suspension, and the like are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel.

Subsequent to the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process at each timer interrupt, control of a big hit game state, a small hit game state, control of a game state, and the like are realized (details will be described later).

Subsequent to the accessory control process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26).
). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Then, C
The PU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the game machine to be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to also output a test signal (right-handed test signal) capable of specifying a period during which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right strike test signal during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol processing, C
The PU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination processing, occurrence of a start winning in the first start winning opening is detected, and the RAM 10
A process for storing the hold information in the second predetermined area and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a winning start occurs in the first winning opening, a random number for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored in a first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information. Is done. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first number of stored memories, a transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start winning prize, the first number of stored memories, and a determination result such as a pre-reading determination to the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special map process flag provided in the RAM 102. Each processing of the first special symbol processing (step S
In 110A to S113A), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the first special symbol normal process of step S110A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0”.
Executed when (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the first special symbol normal process, the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” or “big hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. . Thereafter, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the first variation pattern setting process in step S111A, the value of the first special map process flag is “
1 ". In this first variation pattern setting process, the random number value for determining the variation pattern is determined based on a result of a prior determination as to whether the display result is" big hit "or" small hit ". And a process of determining the variation pattern to be one of a plurality of types using the above. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. (Such as the type of reach effect), and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

In the first special symbol variation process in step S112A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”.
Is executed when In the first special symbol variation process, a process for setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is measured. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the first special symbol change processing ends. I do.

In the present example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) and the first special symbol is changed.
When the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, a small hit may occur in the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, and the small hitting game may be controlled. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hitting game is being performed (specifically, the value of the second special map process flag is before the small hitting release). It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the processing from the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hitting game is being performed, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing. In this way, the value of the first special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing unless the small hit game is being performed. By performing such control, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the small hit game ends. It is controlled to be. In addition, not limited to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the change display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first special symbol is interrupted (the timer is stopped). The update may be interrupted.

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, if the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be interrupted, the interruption period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the execution period and the interruption period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference is large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stoppage of the swing of the decorative design, and the effect gives the player an uncomfortable feeling. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than the KT state (the first KT state and the second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state while the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state.

Further, in the case of the above-described configuration, for example, in the first KT state, the game ball is substantially difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is performed, so that the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. May be configured. On the other hand, in the second KT state, in the small hit control, the game ball can easily win, and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be configured to be longer than in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, the length of the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pre-processing period may be varied depending on the game state, similarly to the small hit ending period.

In the first special symbol stop process in step S113A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”.
Is executed when In the first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the change of the first special symbol, and stops and displays the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol (
Derivation) is performed. When the display result is "big hit", a setting process for starting a big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, a process for starting a small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the control is set to the probable change state, the KT state, or the high base state, and the end of the rounding is established. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

The processing executed in the second special symbol processing (step S25B) is the same as the processing executed in the first special symbol processing (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. Each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as the hold information.

In this example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol change process to change the change of the second special symbol. During display, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol and the small hit game may be controlled. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103
) Determines whether or not a small hit game is being played (specifically, whether the value of the first special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening processing to the small hit end processing). Judgment), if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol change processing. The value of the flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the first
During the small hit game based on the special symbol variation display, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the small hit game ends. In addition, not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol,
The processing for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the change of the second special symbol may be interrupted (the update of the timer is interrupted).

In addition, the small hit control based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol may be configured such that the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period varies depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S25C illustrated in FIG. 4 as the accessory control processing. In this accessory control process, the CPU 10
Step S12 is performed according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102.
Any one of the processes from 0 to S128 is selected and executed. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

The accessory control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “0”. In this character accessory control normal processing, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is performed, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is performed, the processing for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “1”.

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “2”.

The big hit opening pre-processing of step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit game state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit number of rounds executed are set in accordance with, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

The big hit opening processing in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and a process based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. The processing includes determining whether it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “4”. The processing during the opening of the big hit is ended.

The post-big hit release processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the big winning port has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether the number of times of execution of the round has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to perform a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “3”. The value of the flag is updated to “5”. When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The big hit end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as a staging operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control, KT control, and high base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the special winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “7”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

The small hit opening processing in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “8”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

The small hit end processing in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is performed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set to a predetermined time (for example, 2
(Milliseconds). At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, when a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibition state is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt inhibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s) The timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. Will be For example, the effect control command that has been read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1
22 is turned on. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative luminous body such as a frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and a driving of the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using the various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a control effect command at the time of a start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120
Steps S170 to S1 according to the value of the rendering process flag provided in
One of the processes of 77 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. Image display device 5
If it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in, the value of the effect process flag is set to “
1 ", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 is driven, the voice control board 13 8L and 8L by outputting a command (sound effect signal) for
Various types of display during variable display of decorative symbols, such as outputting voices and sound effects from R, and turning on / off / flashing the frame LED 9 and decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Performs production control. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

The wait process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect process. Also, when the reception waiting time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In this small hit production process, the production control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed based on the set contents. Further, in the small hitting effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hitting game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. is there"
5 ”, and the small hit production process ends.

The small hit end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hitting game state, and executes various effect control based on the set contents at the end of the small hitting game state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process ends.

The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In the big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and executes various effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-").
The variable display may be performed only by repeating the display of the symbol and the extinguishing of the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).
.

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that mounts one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (“high”, “high”
Expressions such as “low” and “differentiate”) may include that one of them has a ratio of “0%”. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM01 as shown in FIG.
6, various control boards are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also has a main board 1
1 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the effect control board 12 and the effect control board 12
And so on. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and the effect control board 12 has speakers 8L, 8R, frame L
Various effect devices such as ED9 are connected, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG.
Various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the M201. The main substrate 11 mainly includes
A function of setting random numbers used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an example of command information addressed to a sub-side control board including the effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting control commands as control signals, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The display of the variation of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

As shown in FIG. 9C, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029.
The information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the TM030.

The main board 11 captures various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, and the like. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 for transmission to the terminal 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

The main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is sealed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material as shown in FIG. 9-3, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided at the center of the main board 11. (For example, 7 segments), and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is disposed on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Main board 11
Is invisible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, so the front when viewing the main board 11 is when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened. And is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) has a winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entry area"). ), And the various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning ratio based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, various winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination after the installation in the game hall can be confirmed. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also,
When the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the power supply board is sealed in a board case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency,
A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 which functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later is provided on the lower right side of the rear surface of the power supply board.
2 and a power switch 21TM055. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade can set a predetermined number of boards such as the main board 11, the production control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated,
If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation are facilitated.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05
2 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by operating a predetermined key is opened, and only a clerk having a predetermined key operates. Operable. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among game store clerks. The lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and off by a predetermined key.
Although the switch is capable of performing the switching operation of the FF, the switch may be capable of performing the switching operation and performing an operation (for example, a pressing operation) different from the switching operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even when no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which a key can be inserted and removed only in an OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 9C, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging the gaming balls that have won each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and a decoration. An LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the application LED is included.

FIG. 9B is a block diagram illustrating components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9B, the payout control board 21
The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037
PU21TM371, payout control microcomputer 21 having RAM and ROM
It is realized by TM370 and an I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then is output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

As shown in FIG. 9B, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2, and the front face of the game board 2 can be opened and closed. And a door frame opening sensor 21TM300 which is provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a to be covered, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is input. 21TM37
0 indicates that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

The detection signal from the delivery motor position sensor 21TM295 is transmitted to the relay board 21TM07.
2 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037.
The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and indicates that a game ball is clogged.
That is, it is used to detect so-called ball bite. The dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the dispensing control board 21TM037 includes a ball-out switch 21T.
If the detection signal from M187 indicates that the ball has run out, or if the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates that the tank is full, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state,
The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a low level full signal to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the launch of the ball from the hit ball launching device. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The tank full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is
A driving signal (a signal for driving the firing motor 21TM094, which is input to one of the input sides of an AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the TM090 and drives the firing motor 21TM094, and serves to supply power from a power supply board) Is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full-state signal, the firing motor 21TM094
The output of the firing motor signal to is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a serial communication circuit 21T for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100.
M380 is built in. In this embodiment, a game control microcomputer 10
0 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the serial communication circuit 21TM.
In order to confirm the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the 505, 21TM380, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal, ) Is exchanged (transmitted / received). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When a prize ball request signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, a signal notifying the fact (reception A
(CK signal) to the microcomputer 100 for game control. In this embodiment,
By putting specific data on the prize ball request signal or the received ACK signal, a specific data is transmitted between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange data. For example, when a prize occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of a prize ball request signal, and sets the prize for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. And the payout control microcomputer 21TM3.
When the winning ball payout operation is completed, data indicating the end of the winning ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the set received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. I do. When a predetermined error (error such as lending a ball, filling up the tank, running out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is performed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits, via the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lending balls to a terminal board (an external terminal board for a frame and an external terminal board for a board). Is output to 21TM160. Note that a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b.
Are omitted.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is connected to the output port 21TM37.
An error signal is output to the LED 21TM374 for error display using a 7-segment LED via 2c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to prize ball LED21TM053 and ball out LED21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. The detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

Further, the payout motor 21TM from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.
The drive signal to 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a.
Are provided, but are not shown in FIG. 9C.

A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indication lamp, a connection stand direction indicator, a card insertion indication lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 has a frequency display LED
21TM060, ball lending possible LED 21TM061, ball lending switch 21TM062, and return switch 21TM063 are connected.

From the interface board 21TM066, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ball rental switch signal indicating that the ball rental switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated in response to the operation of the player. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066.
A connection signal (VL) is provided between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037.
Signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) are input ports 21TM.
372f and output port 21TM372d. Card unit 21
An interface board 21TM066 is provided between the TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037.
Is interposed. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9B.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 causes the card unit 21TM050.
To output the PRDY signal. When the power is turned on, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a VL signal. Dispensing control microcomputer 21TM37
0 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit controls the payout control board 2.
A BRQ signal is output to 1TM037.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a card unit 21T.
When the EXS signal for M050 rises and the falling of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of loaned balls to the player. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21T
M370 lowers the EXS signal to card unit 21TM050. afterwards,
The prize ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100 on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is the payout control board 21T.
It is supplied from M037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed by the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066.
Done through. In this example, the card unit 2TM is connected to a power supply line of 24V AC for the card unit 21TM050 provided in the interface board 21TM066.
A fuse for protecting 1TM050 is provided to prevent a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage from being supplied to card unit 21TM050.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, a jackpot winning probability (a winning rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value. . The set value is made up of six levels 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player,
As the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the degree of advantage gradually decreases.

FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display, and the case where the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value of the big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability (1/30) as that of the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.
0) wins the jackpot.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability (1/28) as that of the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.
0) wins the jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (
1/280) to win the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. "2", "3"
”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of“ ”. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as the case where the first special symbol is the subject of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9E, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. "2", "3"
, And "4", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9F, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. "2", "3"
, "4", and "5", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability according to the set value. FIG. 9-4
The “probability” shown in (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9A to 9F. Provided separately, the jackpot determination is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special figure designation buffer. Is also good.

In the present embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion effect)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value. Fig. 9-5 (1),
(2) and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which the “cloudy” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen.
FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the big hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 sets the setting value specified by the received setting command to R
By storing in the AM 102, it is possible to determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set values. For example, based on an effect control command transmitted when the big hit gaming state ends, a character (“B”) that notifies the image display device 5 that the big hit gaming state has ended.
END image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the stored set value, together with the “ONUS end” character).

The table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4) indicates that the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the “sunny” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), respectively, FIG. 9-5 (2)
The determination values for the case of determining the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9 and the case of determining the “rain” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (3) are assigned.

The effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “
In the case of "2", it is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) is executed at a low ratio (for example, 20%), and a medium ratio (for example, 40%) so(
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in 2),
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). If the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%).
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “sunny” mode shown in (1), and the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%) ), And a moderate percentage (for example, 30%) of “rain” shown in (3).
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the mode. When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a low rate (for example, 20%), It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in what mode the setting suggestion effect is performed, and The entertainment of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in the manner in which the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends is performed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the “sunny” mode. You expect it to be done.

(Process at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21).
TM4010). In this process, a parity check is performed as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103
Indicates that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is a regular value, for example,
5 is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values as set values stored in the set value storage area, and six levels of set values having different big hit probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. The set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like correspond to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the game arcade), the set value storage area stores the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values. (0 in this example) is assumed to be stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (step S21)
(TM4020 YES), confirm whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21 TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the mode shifts to a setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030),
The CPU 103 checks whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S
(YES in 21TM4040), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not RAM clear (initialization of a game state) has been determined to be executed.
This indicates that the M clear has been determined to be executed. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear is executed after the processing relating to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power recovery is 0 (the initial value is not set). The notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are determined by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300.
The detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected is sent from the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the opening of the glass door frame 3a. A detection signal indicating that the state has been detected is output.
When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, Upon recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected,
By notifying the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 side allows the game machine frame 3 to be opened and the glass door frame 3a to be opened. The open state can be individually recognized.

In addition, a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected from the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 to the game control microcomputer 100. If the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the game control has been output (that is, the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 By the input of the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4070). . And lock switch 21TM
If 051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), as shown in FIG.
Processing after step S21TM4510 relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
Move to When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, setting values can be checked and changed. When the mode shifts to the setting checking mode, setting values can be checked.

That is, the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S21T).
The setting value is a regular value (YES in step M4010) (YES in step S21TM4020).
), If no power interruption has occurred during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030)
The setting value can be changed and / or confirmed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070). Becomes On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode Without being controlled by the mode, step S21TM4 described later
Then, the flow shifts to 760 (transmission of setting command).

In the present embodiment, in order to set the state in which the change of the set value is not permitted but the set value can be checked (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (2) 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON are required. CPU
103 indicates a state in which the set value can be confirmed when the conditions (1) and (2) are both confirmed by the determination processing in step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), (3) a clear switch (setting changeover switch)
On condition that the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that 21TM052 is ON (YES), a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode), as described later, is provided. It is possible to transfer to.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the set value, is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. Can not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or there is some irregularity. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the set value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting change mode is not controlled.

In this embodiment, when one of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state as the condition (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although the control is possible, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even if the glass door frame 3a is open, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode May not be controlled.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4060, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the mode is not controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and a step S21TM47 described later is performed.
The process proceeds to 60 (transmission of setting command). When it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM407).
0, NO), and the flow shifts to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010),
If the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103
The process moves to step S21TM4120. Also, in checking the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), the set value storage area contains a regular value (0 to 5).
Is not stored (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103
The process moves to step S21TM4120. In addition, in checking the setting change flag,
If it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030) (YES in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21T.
The process moves to M4120.

Here, even if the normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, NO is determined in step S21TM4010. Then, control goes to a step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Mode. Also, if the backup RAM area is checked for data (step S21TM4010), but the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), a normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Also, if the setting change mode was controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). CPU
When 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (
In step S21TM4130, it is checked whether lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4130).

If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130)
The CPU 103 checks whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S
If YES in 21TM4140), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes in and after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, step S21TM413
0 and the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (step S21TM4
If NO in step S21TM4140, if clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON in step S21TM4140 (N in step S21TM4140)
In O), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value abnormality indicating that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. An error command is transmitted to effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value error command, the image display device 5
Informs that the set value may be abnormal. For example, a message that “the setting value may be abnormal” is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn off the power switch 21TM055).
), When the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on), a notification is issued to prompt the user to shift to the setting change mode and perform an operation for changing the set value (fix the set value). For example, a message is displayed that states "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off and shift to the setting change mode." Note that similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined loop processing (step S
21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM420).
After performing 0), by displaying the character “E” on the display monitor 21TM029,
“Even though the setting value may not be a regular value (0 to 5), a transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all YES is determined in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is satisfied. Has not been entered and the mode has not been shifted to the setting change mode "(step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from an output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21T).
M4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit provided for the gaming machines, a call lamp device, or the like). Is done.

During the loop processing period, the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029 displays 4m
The letter "E" is displayed every s. The provision of the weight of 4 ms prevents excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. During the loop processing, the security signal is continuously output. By outputting the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer or the like, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a regular value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal. ), It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode).

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (step S2).
If the setting value is not a regular value (NO in 1TM4010) (step S21TM4020)
NO) and when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when YES is determined in step S21TM4030). If so, the game should not be performed in this state. It is necessary to fix the set value of the storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1
) The gaming machine frame 3 is open, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON,
(3) Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state.
Two conditions are required. The CPU 103 determines these (1) by performing the determination processing in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140.
When it is confirmed that all of the conditions (3) to (3) are satisfied, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, if the determination in any of Steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 is NO, the processing shifts to the above-described loop processing (Steps S21TM4200 to Step S21TM4220).

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), it is not possible to shift to the normal game process. No. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (step S21TM4)
(NO at 030), to change the set value, but to allow the set value to be checked (setting check mode) (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is open (step S2).
Two conditions are required: (1) YES in TM4060) and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4)
030, YES), (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is open (step S21TM4120)
(YES in step S21TM4). (2) Lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4)
Even if the two conditions of (YES at 130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied,
(3) Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 in step S21TM4140
When it is determined that 2 is not in the ON state (NO), the game is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Will be.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS.
This will be described using -8. 9-7, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). Regular values (0 to 5) are stored in the set value storage area.
) Is stored (YES in step S21TM4510), step S21
Move to TM4530. If the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores the regular value in the set value storage area as “0” having the lowest big hit probability. Is stored (step S21TM4520).
Then, control goes to a step S21TM4530.

Next, after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530), the CPU 103 executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power outage or the like has been input. Immediately before the operation becomes impossible due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, R
A process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up to the AM 102;
The data protection processing of the RAM 102 is executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off processing, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

Thereby, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S
Repeat processing from 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or step S21T
(M4530 to Step S21TM4570 and Step S21TM4650 are being repeated), and if the power is cut off, Step S21TM40 after the power is restored.
At 10, the data check is properly executed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the set values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area.
Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4550).
). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. The clerk of the amusement hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the amusement hall may actually May be incorrectly recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is
The set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Then, CPU1
03 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570)
YES), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the end of the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode), the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command designating control to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4650). Then, the flow shifts to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the end of the mode (here, the setting change mode), CP
U103 sets a setting change in-progress flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM4580). The area where the value of the setting change flag is stored is
Since it is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power supply is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) at the next power on.

Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that control has been performed in the setting change mode (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of the setting change mode command, the game control microcomputer 100
Can shift to the setting change mode. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting switch information indicating whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and checks whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (YES in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4.
The process moves to 680. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time a store clerk at the game hall operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on and when the last power is turned off) is 3 If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 is accordingly updated. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4650).
21TM4590) and the state in which the setting value cannot be updated (step S21TM4620) correspond to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed.
The period during which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode is from step S21TM4530 to step S21.
The processing of TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21T).
M4070 is determined as YES), clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052
Is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag remains 0).

In addition, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) are executable, the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590), and the setting value is updated (step S21TM4620).
Is equivalent to a setting change mode in which setting values can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21T).
M4070 or step S21TM4130 is determined to be YES), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 is determined to be YES, and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150). That is set).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms again (step S21T
(M4530), and repeats the processing from step S21TM4540. That is, R
If the value of the AM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (YES in step S21TM4680), CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4680).
Step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the normal game process is performed thereafter. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9 (1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560),
In response to the end of any one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continuously output until at least one second has elapsed from the end of the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The value of the security signal timer is set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed irrespective of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or to the setting confirmation mode (determination of which mode is performed). (Without) a common process. Also, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is performed regardless of whether the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. No) is performed as a common process. As described above, the output control of the security signal is simplified by controlling the output start control and the output end control of the security signal in common when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Thus, the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the output of the security signal is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , It is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, step S21T immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.
In M4710, a common value (1000 ms) is set in the security signal timer when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode and the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode, the external device side can use any mode. It will be difficult to determine whether or not it has been controlled.

Thus, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, step S21 is performed once.
After setting 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in the TM4710, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 to be described later, reset the value of 30,000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM (overwriting) ). That is, after the security signal remaining output period is once set to 1 sec, the security signal remaining output period is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the above-described signal output control is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is set to the end of the setting confirmation mode if the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2). 1 sec has elapsed since the start of the setting change mode, and 30 sec has elapsed since the end of the setting change mode when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted. In processing (for example, information output processing), the value of the security signal timer is 10
The output of the security signal is continued from 00 ms to 0 ms, and is controlled in the setting change mode (when the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is 1).
In the case where the time is changed from 30 seconds to 30 seconds), in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted, the security signal is output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30000 ms to 0 ms. Will be continued. When the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, or when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 3 ms) at a timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing.
The output of the security signal may be continued from 0000 ms) to 0 ms, and the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process after the output of the security signal.

As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 second between when the control in the setting confirmation mode ends and when the control in the setting change mode ends,
When the control is performed in the setting change mode, 30 seconds after the control in the setting change mode ends.
Until the time elapses, the security signal is continuously output. With such a configuration, the control of the security signal output is shared, and the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode.
The output period of the security signal can be made different between the case where the setting change mode is controlled.

As a result, in the external device, it is also possible to know whether the initialization process has been performed and the setting has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode, or the initialization process has been performed and the setting has been changed to the setting change mode. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the control mode has been set to the setting confirmation mode without performing the initialization process. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process has been performed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

In addition, even if a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor,
A security signal will be output. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area of the RAM 102 (however, an area cleared by the initialization processing) based on the detection of the abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that a security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set at the time of power restoration.

Here, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode at the time of power restoration, since the RAM clear is not executed, the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output processing. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to prevent the output period of the security signal from being limited to a period until one second elapses from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, if the setting is changed to the setting change mode when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so that the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (the power failure occurs). At this time, it is unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected.) As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds elapse (according to the execution of the RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 in FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. The value of the security signal timer to be set in the period may be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the processing in step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the setting change in progress flag is cleared and the power is cut off thereafter, it is determined that the setting change in progress flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (0
To 5) is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (Step S)
21TM4760). Note that, even when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed, and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and the effect control CPU 12
On the 0 side, if the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is, the player may erroneously understand the setting value. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the setting value (1 to 6), and An effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

The present invention is not limited to this mode, and the CPU 103 sets the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command, and sets the effect control. For C
You may make it transmit to PU120. As a result, the setting value range specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command on the image display device 5 as it is, or executes an effect indicating the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately notify or suggest the set value. In addition, effect control CP
It is not necessary for the U120 to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, by executing an effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command, the setting value can be suggested. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770).
This means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S
21TM4010), the set value is determined to be a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), and no power interruption has occurred during the setting change (step S21T).
NO at M4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is
Since it is in the FF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the processing at the time of power-off recovery without RAM clearing may be executed.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and executes the game control timer interrupt processing (special (Including a pattern process). That is, when the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, or when the control in the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is 0 or not. Without executing the clearing, the backup command is transmitted as the command at the time of the power-off recovery, and the process shifts to the normal game process.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power interruption based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply is performed (the RAM is not cleared). That). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the frame LED 9
And the like, it is possible to notify that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed (the RAM has not been cleared) based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the processing at the time of turning on the power with the RAM clear.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting 30 seconds as a value of the security signal timer and a process of performing a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. After the interruption is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, R
The data (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the AM 102 is cleared and the initial value is set. The set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which the tally values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are stored for each set value is not cleared, and the tally for each of these set values is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). Note that RA
By the M clearing process, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

The reason why the set values stored in the set value storage area are not cleared in the RAM clear processing is as follows. (A) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It is stored (YES in step S21TM4020).
(B) When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the set value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or a normal value is stored by an operation in the setting change mode (step S21TM4610). And step S21TM4620).
Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). Step S21TM1
By the processing of 430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a flag for selectively performing processing in accordance with a control state such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, or the like is initialized. The value is set.

After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21T).
M1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). Effect control CPU 120
Then, the initialization processing was performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM was cleared without restoring from the power-off based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply). Recognize When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect such as the game state is initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 (data when the power supply is stopped). On the basis of the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovery from the power failure.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). Thereby, step S21TM4 after the setting change mode ends.
The value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in 710 is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. If the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer without executing step S21TM4710. ), The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, if the RAM clear has not been executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode has been controlled), this step S21TM14 is executed.
Since the processing in step S65 is not executed, the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM47.
The value remains at 1 second set at 10.

By setting the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). Thereafter, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the interrupt, the value of the security signal timer is set to 2 m.
The output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 by subtracting s.

Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11
Outputs a connection confirmation signal to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (
Step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 executes a process in accordance with, for example, a random number circuit setting program, so that the random number circuit 104
Make settings to update the value of.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the predetermined time (for example, 2
The register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, 2 m
It is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every s.

Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to a normal game process in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a large hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is used to determine an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable prize ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one round (the normal value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal to control the other microcomputer, or the game machine control process. When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power-off recovery.
If it is determined in 21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). (Depending on the state of the frame 3a), the processing may be shifted to the processing at the time of restoration from the power failure.

Further, in this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear))
However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. If it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Under the condition (according to the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear))
You may move to

As described above, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when turning on the power.
By setting the N state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to the ON state, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode and to initialize the gaming state and the like (to clear the RAM). Execution). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state and the like can be controlled. Is not initialized (step S21TM40)
It is possible not to set the RAM clear flag to 1 by making a NO determination at 40 or step S21TM4140). In this way, the clerk at the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. I have.

As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting was changed to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the setting value that is to be determined on the game arcade side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process and stops the game (step S21). S21TM4200 to step S21TM42
20 loop processing), and outputs a security signal in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started with the set value being unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed),
It is possible to notify the external device that the apparatus has been controlled to the setting change mode when the power is cut off.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 sets the condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030) (FIG. If step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES, a set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4120).
The game is stopped (step S21TM4200) together with step S21TM4190).
"E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the loop processing of step S21TM4220).
Is displayed (step S21TM4210).

In the example illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 10, the character “E” is displayed on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, thereby causing the store clerk at the game arcade to generate an abnormality (to change the setting change mode). (It is possible that a power failure has occurred in a controlled state). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays a message on the image display device 5 that “Please turn on the power after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode”, thereby displaying Operation to change the set value by turning off the power once (power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turning on the power again (when power switch 21TM055 is turned on). (To confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3
Is open (YES in step S21TM4120), and (ii) lock switch 21T
M051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii)
The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21).
When it is determined that the answer is YES in TM4140), the mode is controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM0)
29 is not executed, and a message is displayed on the effect control board 12 (“E” is displayed).
After turning off the power, turn on the power again and shift to the setting change mode.)).

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 receiving the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “setting change mode is in progress” or a message “change setting value by performing setting change operation” can be displayed on image display device 5. Thereby, the clerk at the game hall or the like can recognize that the setting change mode is being controlled, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052.
Is operated, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed to the expected set value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state to fix the set value and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game process.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, (i) to (ii) above
If any of the conditions in i) is not satisfied, the mode is not controlled to the setting change mode,
After the setting value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), the game is stopped (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21T)
The display of “E” in M029 is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side (“Please turn on the power after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode”) is also performed. .

As described above, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). To change to the setting change mode. ")
Is also performed, the state of the gaming machine is notified that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied after the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Will be. In this case, the store clerk at the game hall grasps that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again by operating such that all of the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed to the expected set value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be determined and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

As described above, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied at the time of power restoration (a),
Error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM029)
The display is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without performing “E” in the above, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the set value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied at the time of power restoration (b), the system cannot shift to the setting change mode at the time of power restoration, even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. State, the game is forcibly stopped (step S21TM420).
0 to a loop process of step S21TM4220), and an error display (step S21TM4210: “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 is performed. This makes it possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value has not been determined, thereby realizing appropriate game control.

If the setting change flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030)
ES), when all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transition to the setting change mode are satisfied, and when one of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) is not satisfied, A different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the setting value may be abnormal.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode (or the condition for shifting is satisfied). Is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 receives this command.
In this case, it is preferable to display a message “the setting value may be abnormal” and a message “the setting is automatically controlled to the setting change mode” on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the transition condition is not satisfied, as described above, the step S21TM4
It is preferable to send a 190 setting value error command.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process proceeds to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21T
In response to the operation of M051 (change from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch (Clear switch) When the 21TM052 is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. become.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) issues a lock switch operation command,
And / or an operation for changing a setting value is performed based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command even though the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not controlled. Can be specified and that effect can be notified. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the character “operation of the lock switch has been detected.” In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the text “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed. As a result, the store clerk at the amusement arcade clearly understands that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and Can be confirmed.

The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process proceeds to the normal game process, the lock switch 21TM
051 has been operated, and a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052
The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140).
Only when it is confirmed that the three conditions are satisfied, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step S21T).
NO at M4570).

The present invention is not limited to this mode, and as shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii)
), The RAM clear flag is set to 1 without checking whether or not the three conditions are satisfied (step S21TM4150), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step S21TM4).
(NO at 570).

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. (Step S
At 21TM4030, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied (step S21TM4150), and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (step S21TM4150). The part that is not controlled in the game stop state (the processing corresponding to the loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is different from the processing shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on, and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. The state is controlled and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, and the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the three conditions (determined NO in step S21TM4570). When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting values in the setting value storage area can be changed (YES in step S21TM4030). Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied, the control is forcibly controlled to the setting change mode.

As described above, when the power is cut off during the control to the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. Is automatically controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not
Workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

If the setting change flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030)
ES), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM).
Even when the condition of (YES in 4130) is not satisfied, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off.
By operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the state,
The set value stored in the set value storage area is changed (Step S in FIG. 9-7).
21TM4610 and step S21TM4620).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is that the lock switch 21TM051 is
That is, the state is switched from the N state to the OFF state (this is to determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, the store clerk who has performed the setting value change operation, once the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, in order to fix the set value and terminate the setting change mode, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S21T).
M4680 is determined to be YES).

Thus, the case where the setting change flag is not set (step S21TM40)
30 (NO in step S21), and when the setting change flag is set (step S21TM40).
30 (YES at 30), while the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is made different, while the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) is made common. The conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode are clarified, and the process is appropriately shifted to the normal game process.

Here, the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030).
), The lock switch 21TM051 is turned on.
A notification urging the user to enter the state may be provided. For example, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190 described above). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and switch it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing when the setting change flag is set. For this reason, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the gaming machine side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is not ended, it becomes impossible to cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take a measure for fixing the set value.

(Setting value storage control in case of power failure during setting value change)
Next, the control for storing the set value when the power is cut off during the change of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, in the setting change mode, when the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area is changed.

First, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by performing the setting value changing operation during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12 (1).

As shown in the order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode.
In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. Next, as shown in the order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in the order 3, in the setting change mode, the first setting change switch (
The setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from “0” to “1” based on the operation of the clear switch 21TM052, and “2” is obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM05
1 remains in the ON state. Further, as shown in the order 4, in the setting change mode,
Based on the operation of the second setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed from “1” to “2”, and the changed set value is set to 1 Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in the order 5, it is assumed that in the setting change mode, the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for terminating the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052.
In the power-off state, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in the order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is set in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 as the set value.
Is stored. This set value “2” is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in the order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the RAM 102
Is read out from the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

When the power is turned on in the order 6, since the setting change flag is set, even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared) when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 is applied. Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the mode is automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

Thus, the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, and the lock switch 21TM0
If the power is cut off without turning off the power supply 51 (without terminating the setting change mode), the set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is retained in the set value storage area when the power is restored. It has been done. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been scheduled may be set. In this case, the clerk of the game arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing the operation of changing the set value again. It is sufficient to shift the gaming machine to the normal game processing, so that workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by performing a setting value changing operation during the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG.

Orders 1 to 4 are the same as in the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), and a description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in the order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051
Is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the determined set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

Thereafter, as shown in the order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, R
The setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the AM 102
Is kept as it is.

Next, as shown in the order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is set in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 as the set value.
Is stored. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in an order 8, when the setting change mode is started, the RAM 102
Is read out from the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode ends. In either case, at the time of power restoration, the setting value changed in accordance with the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is used. , The effective set value (the set value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

Note that the present invention is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when controlled in the setting change mode, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is controlled in the setting change mode. 21
When the TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the operation of terminating the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (by overwriting) based on the fact that the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state is performed, and the setting value is determined. May be. In this case, the display monitor 21TM029
Is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is In accordance with the change, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, even when the setting is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. The operation for ending the change mode is not completed (the lock switch 21TM0
51 is not switched to the OFF state) and the power is turned off, the RAM 10
The setting values stored in the setting value storage area 2 have not been changed since the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area when the power is last turned on is continuously held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is:
The value becomes a value corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time.

As described above, it is possible to appropriately set a set value in the case where power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

In the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode described in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability according to the setting value is provided. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this. Although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to gaming machines (the jackpot probability is 1/300).

  Also, the present invention described below is disclosed in the feature section 21TM.

As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. In the case of a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when the setting value is changed or the like. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of the means O1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of the big hit determination random number)
And
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value (step S
A game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620;
Setting check mode control means (step S)
A game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing 21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650;
A specific signal output unit (a game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode control; ,
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (a value of a security signal timer) relating to a period during which a specific signal is output
) And
The setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (in step S21TM4710, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the setting confirmation mode With the end, the security signal is continuously output until one second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode.
Continue to output security signal until 0 seconds have elapsed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
The game machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the game state (step S21TM4050, step S21TM
A game control microcomputer 100) that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in 4150,
The initialization means initializes a game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting unit can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (If the RAM clear is executed, step S2
30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer with 1TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continue to output security signal until 30 seconds elapse)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value both when the control in the setting change mode is completed and when the control in the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the setting change is performed. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so that the setting process by the setting unit is common and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. The period can be set.

The game machine of means O3 is
A game machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation (detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) to end the setting change mode. The setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode in the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102), which stores the setting information (setting change flag), and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (step S21 based on the fact that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied).
TM4200 to step S21, and repeatedly execute the processing of TM4220 until the power is turned off).
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to the means O3,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game,
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM46)
A game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of 20);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for terminating the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (step S21T).
A setting value error command is transmitted in M4190, and the character "E" can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display in step S21TM4210).
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control unit issues a notification for prompting an operation for changing a setting value. Please migrate! "Message is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the clerk at the amusement arcade, and to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. The invention according to the means P1 to P4 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To provide.

The gaming machine of the means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of the big hit determination random number)
And
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value (step S
A game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Step S21TM472
A game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag with 0).
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine.

The game machine of the means P2 is
The gaming machine of the means P1,
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch (setting Changeover switch) (21TM052 is in an ON state) based on the setting change mode.
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the establishment of the setting change condition (when power is turned on, steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4).
Based on the determination of YES at 140, the process shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is switched to the setting change mode without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided to appropriately set the setting value. Can encourage change.

The game machine of the means P3 is
A game machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification and set the game to a stop state (when the power-on condition is not satisfied, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (any one of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). If NO is determined in step S21TM4200) without shifting to the setting change mode.
To the loop processing of step S21TM4220)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game,
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM46)
A game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of 20);
Said specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (step S2).
1TM4190 transmits a setting value error command, and the character "E" can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210).
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control unit issues a notification for prompting an operation for changing a setting value. Please migrate! "Message is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the clerk at the amusement arcade, and to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. The invention according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. Is to do.

The gaming machine of the means Q1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of the big hit determination random number)
And
Setting change mode control means capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value (step S
A game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Step S21TM472
A game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag with 0).
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means determines whether the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (step S21TM when the power is restored).
If it is determined in 4030 that the setting change flag is set, the control is switched to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and the lock switch 21 is set).
TM051 is ON and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05
The control is automatically switched to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not a condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 2 is ON is satisfied.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
It is to be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, R21 in step S21TM4050, R21 in step S21TM4150).
RAM clear based on the AM clear flag being set (step S21TM
The game control microcomputer 100) for executing 1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
The gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is satisfied based on When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. And the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the end of the setting change mode due to the ON state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. If it is memorized, control is performed in the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030). ), Automatically switches to the setting change mode regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A game machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a shift operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (step S21TM).
4040), the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). Accordingly, the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode is terminated, that is, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied). Specific operation while being controlled to the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680)
The setting change mode can be terminated based on the fact that the setting has been changed to FF).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when the setting change mode is controlled (sets a setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (step S21TM4720 in which the control of the setting change mode ends).
Clears the setting change flag at the timing of),
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation has been performed Control is performed in the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not. The setting change mode is automatically controlled) and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680). Let it do)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the condition for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
A set value storage unit (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs);
Control according to the set values stored in the set value storage means (such as a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) can be executed;
The setting value stored in the setting value storage unit is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled to the setting change mode (in step S21TM4680, the lock switch 2
The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that 1TM051 has been turned OFF),
The setting value storage unit is configured to change the setting value in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode. The set value after the setting is continuously stored (the set value storage area is RA
It is formed in the backup area of M102, and the setting change switch (
When the (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area is changed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the set value after the change operation is changed. Setting value is retained)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the setting value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the setting value storage means, and the setting value corresponding to the setting value is stored. Since the control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
A set value storage unit (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs);
Control according to the set values stored in the set value storage means (such as a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) can be executed;
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting change mode (clear switch) 21TM052 when the setting change mode is controlled in the setting change mode. Only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area), and changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area). To set as a valid set value and exit the setting change mode),
The setting value storage unit is configured to execute the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when the setting change mode is being controlled. (The lock switch 21TM051 is turned off even if the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode.)
If the setting is not switched to the FF, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area is not changed. Therefore, if the power is cut off during the set change mode, the set value before being controlled to the set change mode is retained. )
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 044IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 044IW will be described. First, a gaming state in the present feature part 044IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the present characteristic portion 044IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In the characteristic portion 044IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). The case where it is controlled, the case where it is controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and the case where it is controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (the high probability / the first KT state). , High probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state of the KT states, as described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and Is very rare (for example, about one ball every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the state is controlled so that small hits are likely to occur, and the state is controlled to be in the high base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state among the KT states, as described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, the second K
In the T state, the state is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to be short.

The KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the variable winning prize ball device 6
The probability that B is in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio determined to be a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the ratio determined to be a small hit increases. Therefore, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to fluctuate, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

Note that the configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which the KT state is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning prize ball device 6B will be in the open state as a normal figure is the same as the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol fluctuates. By configuring the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of times of change to a certain time in the KT state is higher than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

In the present characteristic portion 044IW, the time required from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to reach the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and by a group of nails forming a flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the variable winning prize ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing the passing gate 41. When the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be opened when one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required until the variable prize ball is opened. Of game balls can be directly won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the present feature unit 044IW. As shown in FIG. 10A, the special variable prize ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 044IW108 formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which a game ball flows down. Bottom member 0 from the closed state moved forward
By moving the 44IW 108 backward, the large winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this feature part 044IW, as shown in FIG.
Further, the user is guided to a guidance route 044IW100 provided to the right of the special variable winning ball device 7.
The guidance route 044IW100 is further branched into two routes 044IW102 and 103, and the game ball guided to the guidance route 044IW100 is guided to the left route 0444IW102 or the right route 044IW103. When the game ball is guided to the left side route 044IW102, the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 0444IW106. When guided to the right route 044IW103, the game ball is discharged to the discharge area 044IW1.
05, and is detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10A, a V-region opening / closing plate 0
44IW101 is provided, and when the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in an open state, the game ball guided to the guidance route 044IW100 enters the left route 044IW102, and
It is possible to enter the area 044IW104. When the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guidance route 044IW100 moves the right-side route 044IW10.
3 and is discharged from the discharge area 044IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 044IW109.

In addition, in the present feature portion 044IW, when the big hit game is controlled, a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, and after the big hit game ends, on condition that the game ball is detected by the V region switch 044IW106. It is controlled to a probable change state.

Note that the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 044IW106 and the game balls detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107 during one round matches the game ball number detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 044IW106 and the game balls detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107 during one round is equal to the first count switch 23.
If the number does not match the number of game balls detected by the game, it may be determined that there is a special winning opening entrance discharge mismatch error and an error is notified. In this case, it takes some time for the winning game ball to reach the V region 044IW104 or the discharge region 044IW105 immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed. If the number of game balls does not match before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after that, it may be configured to determine that there is a special winning opening entrance discharge mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10B is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards and the like in the present feature unit 044IW.
In the present characteristic part 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10B, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a starting port switch (a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B).
), Count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24))
In addition to the detection signal from
The detection signal from the 4IW 107 is taken and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the present characteristic part 044IW, as shown in FIG.
In addition to the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100, the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory, the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, the solenoid for the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is added. 044IW109.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. FIG. 10-4 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. FIG. 10-3
As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. In addition, not only when the setting can be changed in six steps,
For example, the configuration may be configured to be changeable in two to five stages, or may be configured to be changeable in seven or more stages.

First, the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest with the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the big hit probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the big hit probability “
247/65536 ", which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times higher in the probability-change state (high-probability state) than in the non-probability-change state (low-probability state). In the case of “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for small hits, as shown in FIGS.
Regardless of which of “6” and whether of the non-probable state (low probability state) or the probable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is “6298/65536”. It is constant. That is, in this example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probable change state and the probable change state. As described above, even in the case where the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is made constant, FIG.
As shown in (B), a configuration may be adopted in which the number of determination values for each set value matches by making the outlier probability different for the set values “1” to “6”.

Next, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the change display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example illustrated in FIG. 10A, in the non-probability state (low-probability state), the case of the setting value “1” is the lowest with the jackpot probability of “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the big hit probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the big hit probability “
247/65536 ", which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times as large as the probability change state (high probability state) as compared with the non-probability change state (low probability state). In the case of “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for small hits, as shown in FIGS.
Regardless of which of “6” and whether of the non-probable state (low probability state) or the probable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is “62986/65536”. It is constant. That is, in this example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value,
And it is common to the non-probable state and the probable state. However, in the present example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3), the small hit is achieved. The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the second special symbol change display is the small hit when performing the first special symbol change display). More than the number of judgment values for judgment). As described above, even in the case where the big hit probability is made different depending on the set value while the small hit probability is made constant, FIG.
As shown in FIGS. -4 (A) and (B), the configuration may be such that the number of judgment values for each set value is matched by making the loss probability different between the set values "1" to "6".

In the present example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination value corresponding to the loss is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 10). -3 and FIG.
As shown in -4, there is no set value at which the outlier probability becomes 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the loss differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” is present). , The outlier probability is different).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, when the outlier probability is 0 (that is,
The configuration may be such that there is a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the outlier. For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (the highest jackpot probability), the miss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the miss may not be included.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in the present example, and for example, when the small hit probability becomes 0 (that is,
It may be configured such that there is a determination value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the small hit). For example, in the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10C), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the small hit determination value is not included. Good.

In FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10 (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10 (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probable state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). The probability of loss is different, but the probability of large hits in the probable state (high probability state) is higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered and the outlier probabilities may be matched. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values, for example, “1” and “2”, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. Thereby, in a gaming machine having substantially less than six settable stages or a gaming machine having no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a gaming machine of a type having a six-stage setting change function and a hardware / software configuration Can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The big hit type determination table indicates that the type of the big hit is “2R normal big hit”, “2R probable big hit”, “ "6R normal big hit", "6R probable big hit", or "1
It is a table that is referred to to determine any one of “0R probability change big hit”.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in the characteristic portion 044IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as “10R probable jackpot” with a probability of 9%, and is determined as “6R probable jackpot” with a probability of 56%.
% Is determined as "6R ordinary big hit". Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in the characteristic portion 044IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Is determined to be "10R probable jackpot" with a probability of 10%,
With a probability of 50%, it is determined as "6R probability variable jackpot", with a probability of 5%, determined as "2R probability variable jackpot", and with a probability of 35%, it is determined as "2R probability variable jackpot".

The “10R probability changing big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. Also, “6R probable big hit”
This is a big hit in which the state is controlled to the big hit game state of six rounds and the state is shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. The “2R probability changing big hit” is a big hit in which the state is controlled to a two-round big hit game state and the state is shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends.

The “6R normal big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of six rounds and the state is shifted to the low probability state after the big hit game state ends. The “2R normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the big hit gaming state ends.

In the feature part 044IW, “10R probability variable hit”, “6R probability variable hit”, and “6R probability variable hit”
In the case of "R normal big hit", a big prize is won until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls is won in each round of the big hit game. The mouth is controlled to be in an open state, and a maximum of 10 big winning holes can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probable big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings in the large winning opening that can be won every round is about two to three.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when the big hit game is ended, the game is controlled to one of the first KT state, the second KT state, and the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The manner of transition of the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
FIGS. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams illustrating a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The small hit type determination table indicates that the small hit type is “small hit A
, "Small hit B", or "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in the characteristic portion 044IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as “small hit A” with a probability of 100%. In addition, as shown in FIG.
In the 4IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, “small hit B” is determined with a probability of 70%, and 30 % Is determined as "small hit C".

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of “small hit A”, the special winning opening is opened for only a very short 0.2 second during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12), and the small hit game is performed. It is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning opening. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hitting game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball is won to the special winning opening during the small hitting game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hitting game (see FIG. 10-14), and the game ball is won to the special winning opening during the small hitting game. You can expect the most.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 10-7 to FIG. 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decoration symbol used in the characteristic portion 044IW. EX shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9
T is the second byte of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and the decoration symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decoration symbol 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, a variation pattern #n (n
= 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the non-KT first first symbol shown in FIG. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, any one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06 is determined.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability /
In the case of the first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. FIG.
As shown in 0-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the KT state, the variation is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in the non-KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined to be a loss, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also,
Even when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, even when the non-KT state is in effect, when the change display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning game balls to the special winning opening. Would. Therefore, in the characteristic part 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is increased. Is reduced to reduce the frequency of occurrence of small hits, thereby preventing a situation in which a small hit is aimed at acquiring a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 044IW, the “frequency of occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute). In the KT state, for example,
The occurrence rate of small hits per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is changed even if a big hit occurs. 5
By making the length relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming for a prize ball by unreasonably winning a special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, since the digestion of the first hold memory does not need to be longer than in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the case of a small hit. I have.

In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if the low probability / first KT state is set, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended. The variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times of the variation after that. in this case,
If the first variation display is executed, the low probability / first KT shown in FIG.
At this time, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the change display of the second special symbol is executed as the first change of the low probability / first KT state, any of the second change patterns # 04 to # 06 is performed. Is determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is out of the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds. It is determined. When it is determined that the small fluctuation is the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (second starting winning opening opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds for the small collision. Fluctuation pattern for preparation). In the characteristic portion 044IW, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B is lengthened to actually increase the special variable prize. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately formed. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 044IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, before the transition to the first KT state, the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 are changed. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, it is possible to win a special winning opening. This prevents a situation where a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. When it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for two minutes.

FIG. 10 shows a case where the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed.
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 49th variation shown in -8 (E) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10E, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation patterns # 07 to # 13 are displayed. Determined to be one. Further, as shown in FIG. 10E, when it is determined to be out of the low probability / first KT state as the 2nd to 49th variation,
There is a case where the second variation pattern # 07 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern # 08 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, low probability / 1K
When it is determined to be out of the range from the 2nd to 49th variation of the T state, the second variation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. When the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 10 of the shortened change having a short change time of 5 seconds, and the change time is even shorter as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state,
There is a case where the second variation pattern # 12 with reach is determined. Second variation pattern # 07
, # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored,
The second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 are variation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reserved storages are stored. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. When it is determined to be a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which has triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended, the fluctuation display of the 50th change (that is, the final change in the low probability / first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), as the 50th change of the low probability / first KT state,
When the special symbol change display is executed, it is determined to be one of the second change patterns # 14 to # 16.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, a character display such as “during a chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5, for example. Fig. 10-
As shown in FIG. 8 (F), when it is determined to be a loss or a small hit as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the image display device 5 ends displaying characters such as “CHANCE TIME END !!”. The second variation pattern # 14 or the second variation pattern # 15 accompanied by the display is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10F, when it is determined that the big hit is the 50th change of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as “CHANCE TIME END !!” is displayed on the image display device 5. After the end display to be performed, the second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined resurrection display is determined.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when a large hit occurs in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case in which a big hit has occurred immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the fluctuation of the second special symbol executed during the fluctuation of the big hit of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly released, the forcible release frequently occurs even in the second KT state, and the player loses the small hit. You will not receive any profits.
Therefore, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a short change time, so that the game mode shifts to the big hit game state based on the change of the first special symbol before the forced loss frequently occurs. It is configured.

It should be noted that, unlike the feature part 044IW, even when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol is not forcibly released (for example, the first special symbol is not changed). When the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol big hit symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly removed. In the case of the gaming machine, the change time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. If the change time of the big hit is set to the same short change time as the loss, the player will You will not be able to receive any profits from small hits. Therefore, if the change time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is set to a long change time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is a sufficient time that the small hit can be generated at least a plurality of times. (For example, one minute).

When executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, when the high probability / first KT state is set, the fluctuation after ending the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit which triggered the high probability / first KT state. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. Fig. 10-
As shown in FIG. 9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. You.

In addition, similarly to the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), even when it is determined to be out of the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation time is determined. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 17 having a short variation as short as 5 seconds is determined. On the other hand, high probability / first KT
Even if it is determined that the state is out of the first variation, the second variation pattern # 18 accompanied by the reach is also obtained.
May be determined. Also, when the small change is determined as the first change of the high probability / first KT state, the change pattern (second change pattern # 19) for preparing the second starting winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small fluctuation is the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. FIG.
As shown in -9 (G), when it is determined to be a big hit as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Also, if the change display after the second change is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R certain change big hit which triggered the high probability / first KT state is performed, the change shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is performed. The probability / first KT and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the second variation and thereafter are selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), the high probability / second KT state 2
When the change display of the second special symbol is executed after the change eye, the second change pattern # 2
2 to # 28.

As shown in FIG. 10H, similarly to the low-probability / first KT state in the second to forty-fourth fluctuations, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the second variation pattern # 22 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern # 23 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, high probability / first KT state 2
When it is determined to be out of position after the variation, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. If it is determined that the small hit is the second or higher variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation having a variation time as short as 5 seconds or the variation time of 1 second is determined.
In some cases, the second variation pattern # 26 having a shortened variation as short as seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the small hit is determined as the second or higher change of the high probability / first KT state, the second
In some cases, the variation pattern # 27 is determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second change patterns # 23 and # 26 are one or more second hold storages. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the user is present. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. Also,
If it is determined to be a big hit as the second or higher variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

In the case of executing the change display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, FIG.
The fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in 0-9 (I) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 29 to #
34.

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be out of place in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 29 of a shortened variation as short as 1.5 seconds. Or the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 30 of the normal variation of 5 seconds.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 31 with reach may be determined. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 of the shortened variation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second variation pattern # 33 of the variation may be determined. If it is determined to be a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

More specifically, when the variation pattern is determined, it depends on which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be displayed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using a variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for variation pattern determination,
It is determined which variation pattern to use. FIG. 10-10 is a diagram for determining a variation pattern in the case where the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for high probability / second special symbol for the second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variable display of small hitting is executed, , Irrespective of any of the set values “1” to “6”, the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in the present example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of the 1.5 second shortening variation is selected.

FIG. 10-10 shows, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, in the case of the first KT state, the shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed, and in the case of the second KT state, the shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds has a high probability. Is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a short variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the low probability state, and a short variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the high probability state.

Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, FIG.
The opening pattern of the special variable prize ball device 7 when the game is controlled to the big hit game based on the 10R probability big hit, the 6R probability big hit, and the 2R probability big hit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “the probability big hit”) using 1) will be described. I do. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when a game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, the first count switch 23 detects it.

In addition, in the big hit game based on the probability change big hit, as shown in FIG.
Upon detecting the second game ball winning the big winning opening in the round, the solenoid 044I
W109 is driven, and the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to open, and the V region 044
A game ball can enter the IW 104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes has been detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. When the variable winning prize ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

A game ball enters the V region 044IW104, and the V region switch 0 within a predetermined detection valid period.
When the game is detected by the 44IW 106, the game state is controlled to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the predetermined detection valid period is started at a timing when the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to open, and the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is turned on. This is a period until a predetermined period (in this example, 500 ms) elapses after the closed state is controlled again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), opening of the special variable prize ball device 7 in the case of being controlled to the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal big hit”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when a game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, the first count switch 23 detects it.

In the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG.
Upon detecting the first game ball winning the big winning opening in the round, the solenoid 044I
W109 is driven, and the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in an extremely short period (in this example, 0.
It is controlled to the open state (for 02 seconds). Then, in the first round, a predetermined period (for example, 29
Seconds) or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the winning prize holes is detected.
As shown in 11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again,
The special winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the predetermined detection effective period is an extremely short opening period (0.02 in this example) of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101.
(Seconds), and a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. Therefore, during the predetermined detection valid period, the V region 044
A game ball easily enters the IW 104, and is easily controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the V region 044IW104 substantially during a predetermined detection validity period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to be in a positively changed state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 at a higher rate during the big hit game than in the big hit game based on the normal big hit.

Next, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable winning prize ball device 17 in the KT state. 10-12 show the opening patterns of the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. FIG. 10-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable winning prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit B. Also,
FIG. 10-14 shows the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize winning ball device 1 in the case of the small hit C.
7 shows an opening pattern. FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 10-12 (2). 10 to 14 (2) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). FIG.
As shown in -12 (1) to FIG. 10-14 (1), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and a game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed, and when it is determined that the hit is the ordinary symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20, and when the loss is determined, the shifted symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20. . In the characteristic part 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying a hit symbol or a missing symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG.
As shown in (1) to FIG. 10-14 (1), after the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds elapse, the second start winning opening pre-opening time 0.1 seconds elapses, and then the variable winning prize ball The device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

When a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined that a small hit is made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , In the case of the small hit B, FIG.
As shown in (1), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and the small hit C, as shown in FIG. Device 17 is 1
. It is opened for 8 seconds, and the game ball can enter the special winning opening. (However, in the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens for only a very short 0.2 second, You can hardly expect a prize). However, in the first KT state, FIG.
), The opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is opened. The time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins a special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning prize ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning prize ball device 6B can be opened. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time 0.2 seconds of the next ordinary symbol, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, is there. Therefore, this feature 04
In 4IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Also, in the present characteristic portion 044IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Normally, since the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to the time when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the symbols are not changed is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened. When controlled to the state, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed are more likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). FIG.
As shown in -12 (2) to FIG. 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game switch is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed, and when it is determined that the hit is the ordinary symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20, and when the loss is determined, the shifted symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20. . In the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missing symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG.
As shown in (2) to FIG. 10-14 (2), after the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, and after the time 2.6 seconds before the second starting winning opening opening process has elapsed, the variable winning ball is obtained. The device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

When a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined that a small hit is made, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , In the case of the small hit B, FIG.
As shown in (2), when the special variable prize ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and the small hit C, as shown in FIG. Device 17 is 1
. The open state is maintained for 8 seconds, and the game ball can enter the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short, 0.2 seconds. In the characteristic portion 044IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6
At least 3.8 seconds as an interval period (closed period) after the opening of B (ordinary symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds + second start winning opening opening process time 2.6 seconds) ) Is secured for a relatively long period. Therefore, in the second KT state, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), since the opening time of the variable winning prize ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, the special variable winning prize on the downstream side as compared with the first KT state. A game ball easily enters the ball device 17 and a game ball easily enters a special winning opening. However,
In the case of the small hit A, the special variable prize ball device 17 opens for only a very short period of 0.2 seconds, so that even in the second KT state, it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special prize hole.

In the second KT state, a game ball can easily enter the special winning opening and a prize ball can be easily obtained.
USH "is displayed.

Further, in this example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 (special winning opening) is made different depending on which of the small hit types is the small hits A to C has been described. It is not limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be made different depending on which of the small hit types is the small hits A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of the small hit B or the small hit C, the special variable prize ball device 17 is opened during the small hit game. The special variable prize ball device 17 may be opened two to eleven times. Also, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable prize ball device 17 is somewhat short, by opening the special variable prize ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable prize ball device 17 (special prize opening) is executed. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a certain amount, and various modes are conceivable. In this example, the small hit type is small hit A to
Although the case of three types of C has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, four or more small hit types may be provided.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 044IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 second, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is played. The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Normally, the variable prize ball device 6B is in an open state because the time required for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 and reach the variable prize ball device 6B is longer than the time when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before the control is performed. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed to be won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, the normal symbol variation display is executed, and the variable winning ball device 6 is used.
The processing of opening control of B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically,
This is performed by executing the normal symbol process process (see step S26) by the CPU 103). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is in the probable change state (high probability state) in any of the non-KT state, the first KT state, and the second KT state in the ordinary symbol process processing in step S26. Regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not to make a regular hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In the characteristic part 044IW, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same in each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, respectively, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the same as the second symbol. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable prize ball device 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and increasing it to 2.6 second in the second KT state has been described. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different by making the fluctuating time or the symbol fixing time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. In this case, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the above methods, winning in the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. .

In the characteristic unit 044IW, as will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting a high base flag indicating that the state is the high base state. As shown in 10-14 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state, by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the variable winning prize ball device 6B is opened. The time is controlled to be shorter.

For example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning prize ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the special flag shown in FIG.
) To 10-14 (1), the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled in a first opening pattern (long opening) for long-time opening, and if no special flag is set, FIG. 10-12 (2).
10-14 (2), the variable winning prize ball device 6B may be controlled in a second opening pattern (short opening) for short-time opening. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and control may be performed such that the special flag is not set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when the low probability / last change display in the first KT state is performed, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, low probability / first KT
The special flag described above may be deleted in accordance with the 49th special symbol change stop of the 50 special symbol shortening change periods in the state. With such a configuration, low probability /
When performing the left-hitting notification after the end of the first KT state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the variable winning ball device 6B is long opened.

As described above, when the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable prize ball device 6B, a flag for shortening and varying the variable display of the special symbol is further used. In this case, a special symbol and a flag for shortened variation may be separately managed and controlled.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case where the opening probability of the variable winning sphere device 6B is increased in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. In the variable winning prize ball device 6B, it is possible to prevent the prize from winning in a low probability / non-KT
It is possible to prevent a right-handing operation from being performed during the state.

In the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable symbol is a variable winning prize ball in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the status of the ordinary symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the movement of the second special symbol at the timing of stopping the change. The variable prize ball device 6B does not open until the game ball that has passed through the variable prize ball device 6B or the special variable prize ball device 17 allows the special prize port to win. On the other hand, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the normal symbol fluctuating time is shortened, so that the variable prize ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes the pass gate 41 and reaches the variable prize ball device 6B. Is set to be started, so that in the first KT state, it is possible to eliminate a capture element by a firing operation aiming at a small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

FIG. 10-15 and FIG. 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS.
00 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are effect control commands for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of a special symbol. (Fluctuation pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of the variation. Therefore, the effect control CPU
Reference numeral 120 denotes commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H).
Is received, the image display device 5 is controlled to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (outstroke designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variation big hit. . The command 9003 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command by six.
This is an effect control command (a display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating an R probability variation big hit. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 specifying command (6R normal big hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R normal big hit. . The command 9005 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command by 2
This is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating an R probability variation big hit. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 specifying command (2R normal big hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is a 2R normal big hit. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In addition, in this characteristic part 044IW, the microcomputer 1 for game control
00 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result designation command immediately before the first variation pattern command.
Since the display result specifying command for the special symbol can be determined and the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specifying command for the second special symbol, the display result specifying command can be determined. Can be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result specifying command for the first special symbol and the display result specifying command for the second special symbol may be different.

Also, instead of transmitting the display result designation command, the game control microcomputer 100 responds to each of the 10R probability change big hit / 6R probability change big hit / 6R normal big hit / 2R certain change big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / out. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is finished. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 has been started.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying stoppage of variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol determination designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command transmitted from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. B000 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the start of a big hit game (big hit start specifying command: fanfare specifying command). B001 (H) is an effect control command () for designating the end of the big hit game.
Jackpot end designation command: ending designation command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) for specifying the start of the small hit game. B005
(H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of a special winning opening) for designating a display during a round during a big hit game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) for specifying a display after the round during the big hit game (display of an interval between rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening in a state where the first number of retained memories has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening in a state where the second number of stored memories has not reached four. Note that a command indicating the first number of reserved storages may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second number of retained storages may be transmitted as the second effective start winning designation command. In the example, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is in the first customer waiting state (the first special symbol has not been changed,
This is an effect control command (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command) for designating that the first hold storage is not stored. Command D001 (H) is in the second customer waiting state (second
This is an effect control command (second customer waiting demonstration display designation command) for designating that the special symbol has not been changed and the second hold storage has not been stored. The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (
H) is an effect control command (low-precision / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (highly accurate / first) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state.
KT background designation command). The command E003 (H) indicates that the gaming state is a high probability / second K
This is an effect control command (high-accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display in the T state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command () that specifies the currently set value.
Setting value command). The set value is set to “XX”. For example, setting value "1"
Is set, the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. For example, when the setting value is set to “6”, the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 is a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11.
When the above-mentioned effect control command is received, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16, and the display state of the lamp is changed. To output tone number data. 10-15 and FIG.
Effect control commands other than the effect control command indicated by −16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command relating to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal processing is executed is as follows.
This is a case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A is as follows.
This is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 044 IWS50A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the ordinary accessory control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first reserved storage number (
Step 044IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked. If the first reserved storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is sent to the effect control C
This is transmitted to the PU 120 (step 044 IWS 52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100
02, the respective random number values stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer are read out and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 044IWS53A), and the first reserved storage is performed. The value of the number is reduced by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is reduced by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 044IW).
S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is calculated as the first reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the first reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, and 4. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are determined. The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 0441).
WS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 044 IWS55A. Is executed, the set value command is also transmitted.

The timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to the timing shown in the present example. Or it may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variable flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is the low probability / non-KT state, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued. In some cases, it is determined that the state is the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background designation command is issued.
When the probable variable flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is the high probability / first KT state, and when the probable / first KT background designation command is issued, the probable variable flag is on and the high base flag is off. , A high probability / second KT background designation command is determined and the high probability / second KT background designation command is transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating (step 044IWS57A). Specifically, if the second big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 044I without performing the processing of step 044IWS58A and thereafter.
Move to WS69A. With this, when the change of the first special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly lose regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57A, a process of setting an outlier random number value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and step 044IWS59A is executed.
By moving to, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of the start winning.

Also, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57A, the process of steps 044IWS58A to S63A is not performed, and a random number value (fixed value) of an outlier is set as the hit determination random number. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 044 IWS58A).
), And executes the big hit determination module (step 044IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step 044IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the change display of the first special symbol (step 044IWS61A). . Then, it is determined based on the hit type determination random number whether the big hit type is a 10R certain variable big hit, a 6R certain variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit (step 044IWS62A), the big hit type is stored (step 0444IWS63A), and step 044IWS69A. Move to.

If it is determined in step 044IWS60A that no big hit has occurred, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 044IWS6).
4A). The small hit determination module uses a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination)
This is a program for determining a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 044IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is made based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ( Step 044IWS66A). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for hit type determination (step 0444WS), and stores the small hit type (step 0444W).
S68A). In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, Step 044 IWS
Move to 69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is “0” (step 044IWS69A).
, “0”, the flow proceeds to step 044 IWS75A. If the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 044I).
WS70A), and determines whether it has become “0” (step 044IWS71A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the flow shifts to step 044 IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 1
00 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 044)
Along with the IWS 72A), the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the shortening control of the change display of the special symbol is being performed is reset (step 044 IWS 73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of the fluctuation (step 044IWS74A). Then, control goes to a step 044IWS75A.

In the characteristic part 044IW, as described later, the high base flag is set and the number of times of performing the variable display in the high base state is managed because the low probability is set at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / first KT state) and the variable display is executed 50 times. Low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT
State), when the 50th variation display is started, step 044 IWS7
1A, S71B, Y is determined and the high base flag is reset in steps 044IWS72A, S72B, and the special figure time saving flag is reset in steps 044IWS73A, S73B, and the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state) ).

Note that the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is to continue the right-handed notification and to continue the right-handed state. This is a flag for setting the state as a common effect background with the first KT state.

Then, in step 044IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 044IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbols to be stopped immediately before step 044IWS75A are determined.

In addition, in step 044IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit using one of the non-probable change big hit determination table and the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the game state.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not a special figure time reduction flag indicating that the special symbol variation display is being shortened is being controlled. Is confirmed (step 044 IWS1700A). In this example, by setting the special figure time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol, it is more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (FIG. 10-7). 10-9), a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 10
0 selects the variation pattern table for the first non-KT special symbol shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 044IW).
S1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state)
The game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 044 IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 044 IWS 1701A,
Which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is to be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Is determined (step 044 IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, a variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (
Step 044 IWS 1704A).

Also, in step 044 IWS1703A, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol
Is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and starts measuring the variation time (step 044IWS1705A), and the first special symbol display device The variable display of the first special symbol in 4A is started (step 044IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing (step 044IWS1707A).

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 10
No. 3 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120) (step 044IWS1120A). Note that the case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is a gate passage waiting process (step S121)
This is the case where the value does not indicate the small hitting end processing (step S128), and during the small hitting game (special variable winning prize ball device 17) even during the big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times).
Open).

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a jackpot if not transmitted yet,
And any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) based on the jackpot type determination result Control for transmission to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 044 IWS 1121 A).

Next, the CPU 103 decrements the first variable time timer by 1 (step 044 IWS11).
22A) When the first variable time timer times out (step 044 IWS1123A)
), The control for transmitting the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 044IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 044).
IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044I).
WS1125A). Whether the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, The second showing that a big hit will be made based on the change display of the second special symbol
The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the big hit flag is set.

If the large special symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044IWS1126A). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.
If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is terminated as it is.

If the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big one (step 0).
44IWS1127A). Note that whether or not the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the change display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit type is the 10R certain hit big hit or the 6R certain hit big hit (step 044IWS1128A). It is to be noted that whether or not a 10R probability variable hit is a 6R probability variable hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the type of the big hit stored in step 044IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 6R probability variable hit, the process is terminated.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044IWS
1125A), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 044IWS112).
(Y of 6A), and the variation display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, becomes the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed (step 0).
In the case of Y of 44IWS1127A and N of step 044IWS1128A, the CPU 103
Performs control to transmit the first forced symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 044IWS113).
0A).

By executing the processes of steps 044IWS1125A to S1129A, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the variation display of the second special symbol has a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol which is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example) is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is changed. A large hit and a small hit are prevented from occurring at the same time with the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is determined to be forcible, the variation of the decoration symbol is determined based on the second compulsory symbol determination designation command transmitted in step 044 IWS1129A. Control is performed so as to forcibly display the missing symbol as a display result.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation is a big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit). If the first special symbol variation display is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y of step 044 IWS1128A). In this case, the second special symbol variation process is executed.
Based on the fact that the change display of the special symbol is a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, N is determined in step 044IWS1120A, and the processing of steps 044IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 044IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol that is a certain variation big hit is being executed, the first variation time timer is set during the small hit game. Is interrupted and the first special symbol change display is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a loss or a small hit. Even in the case where there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (refer to N of step 044 IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss or a small hit, is being executed, the first variation during the small hit game is also performed. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hitting game is ended, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 044IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
The PU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 044 IWS).
2011A). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (
Along with step 044IWS2012A), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting termination designation command to effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (the second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the right-hand operation is performed. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the low probability / 1K
During the T state, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on, but the steps 044IWS69A-S
By executing the processing of steps 74A and S69B to S74B, the low probability / first KT state is ended and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered when the 50th variation display is started, and steps 044IWS2010A to S2013A are performed. , S2010B to S2013B are executed, so that the right-handed indicator 26 is turned off when the 50th variation display ends.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the first special symbol display device 4A to derive and display a stop symbol of the first special symbol (step 044IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol determination designation command has been transmitted at step 044 IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, the first special symbol is forcibly set as the stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. The out-of-design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 044IWS2015A). If the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 1
03 sets a big hit start flag indicating that a big hit is started (step 044I)
WS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first big hit flag (step 0).
44IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 0).
Along with the 44IWS2018A), control is performed to transmit a right-turn-on lighting start command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0444IWS2019A). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 044IWS2018A and S2019A, in the present example, the lighting of the right-hand display 26 is started when a large hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

In the present example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41. The lighting of the display 26 may be started.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 044IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 044IWS2020A). If the first small hit flag is set, the effect control C
Control for transmitting the small hit start designation command to the PU 120 is performed (step 044IW).
S2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 04).
4IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-small hit opening processing (step 044IWS2026A). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally advantageous for the player to perform a right-handing operation during the small hitting game. But,
As described above, in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only the small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning opening. For this reason, in the present example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is not turned on, and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 044IWS2027A).

In the present example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right strike notification for urging the player to fire a game ball to the right of the game area. I have. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification for prompting the player to fire the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 as the right strike notification can be executed. It may be.

In addition, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right hit notification and the launch promotion notification are not executed, and in the state where the game ball has won the first start winning opening, the right strike notification and the launch promotion notification are performed. (In this case, since the game is in the gate passage waiting state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not immediately started even if a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening, and the first holding symbol is stored). May be configured.

Conversely, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, a sound output of a small volume or a small screen display). Thus, a left-handed notification that prompts the player to perform a shooting operation of a game ball to the left of the game area may be performed. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a sound output of a large volume, Left-handed notification may be performed by a large screen display). With such a configuration, the launch notification can be accurately performed. In particular, with the above configuration, for a player who has accidentally fired a game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is low. , For players who intentionally perform a right-handed operation,
A left-handed notification may be performed in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high.
With such a configuration, it is possible to urge a player who intentionally performs a right-hand operation to return to a left-hand operation from a store clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, a left-handed notification may be made when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. Passing gate 4
In 1, when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-hitting notification is performed, and a specific number smaller than the predetermined number in the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is performed. A left strike notification may be made when more than one (for example, one) game ball is detected.

In this characteristic part 044IW, the demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When the demonstration display is performed in the normal state, the demonstration gate 044IW goes to the pass gate 41, the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening. If the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be ended and the left-handed notification may be performed.

FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 044 IWS50B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second reserved storage number (
Step 044IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second reserved storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is sent to the effect control C
This is transmitted to the PU 120 (step 044 IWS 52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100
02, read out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer and store it in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 044IWS53B), and the second reserved storage The value of the number is reduced by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is reduced by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step 044IW).
S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is represented by the second reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the second reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, and 4. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 0441).
WS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 044 IWS55B. Is executed, the set value command is also transmitted.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS56B). Note that the specific way of transmitting the background designation command is determined in step 044 IWS of the first special symbol normal process.
This is the same as the processing indicated by 56A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating (step 044IWS57B). Specifically, if the first big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 044I without performing the processing of step 044IWS58B and thereafter.
Move to WS69B. With this, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly be out regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a hit as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 044IWS59B, so that at any time during the start winning, May be forcibly removed regardless of whether the hit determination random number has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57B, the process of steps 044IWS58B to S63B is not performed, and a random number value (fixed value) of a loss is set as the hit determination random number. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 044IWS58B
), And executes the big hit determination module (step 044IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step 044IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step 044IWS61B). . Then, it is determined based on the hit type determination random number whether the big hit type is 10R certain big hit, 6R certain big hit, 2R certain big hit, or 2R normal big hit (step 044IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 044IWS6).
3B), and proceed to step 044 IWS 69B.

If it is determined in step 044IWS60B that it is not a big hit, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 044IWS6).
4B). The small hit determination module uses a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination)
This is a program for determining a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step 044IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step 044IWS65B). Step 044IWS66B). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for hit type determination (step 044IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 044IW).
S68B). In the present example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, control goes to a step 044IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the high base number counter to “0”.
Is determined (step 0444IWS69B), and if it is “0”, the flow proceeds to step 044IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 044IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become “0” (step 044IWS71B). The value of the high base counter is "0"
If not, the flow shifts to step 044 IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 044IWS72B) and shortens the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that the control is being performed is reset (step 044IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 044IWS74B). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS75B.

Then, in step 044IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 044IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 044IWS75B is determined.

In step 044IWS59B, it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be made by using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) illustrated in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process has been described. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first executes step 0
The same processing as that of the 44IWS1700A is performed, and it is confirmed whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, it is not in the KT state)
The microcomputer 100 for game control selects the variation pattern table for the second non-KT special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability change flag and the high base flag are set, As a variation pattern table for determining a pattern, any of the second KT-time second patterns shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I)
Select the special pattern variation pattern table. For example, if the probable change flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first change is shown in FIG.
) Is selected, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, the variation pattern table shown in FIG.
The variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in -8 (E) is selected, and if it is the 50th variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected. Also, for example,
If both the probable variable flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (G). If it is the second variation or later, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Also, for example, if the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the ordinary accessory control process (step S120) (step 044IWS1120B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is a case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), and is neither during a big hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during a small hit game (special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a jackpot if not transmitted yet,
And any of the display result specifying commands (display result 1 specifying command, display result 2 specifying command, display result 3 specifying command, display result 5 specifying command, display result 6 specifying command, display result 7 designation command) for effect control CPU 120
Is transmitted (step 044 IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 decrements the second variable time timer by 1 (step 044 IWS11).
22B) When the second variable time timer times out (step 044 IWS1123B)
), The control for transmitting the second symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 044IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 044IWS1130B).

When the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044I).
WS1125B). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined, for example, by setting the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, The first showing that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol
The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the big hit flag is set.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044IWS1126B). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined, for example, by setting the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a first small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.
If the small hit symbol has not been derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends.

If the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the changing display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 0).
44IWS1127B). Note that whether or not the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the change display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit type is a 10R certain big hit, a 6R certain big hit, or a 2R certain big hit (step 044IWS1128B). . Whether it is a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, or a 2R probability variable hit can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 044IWS63B. 10R probable jackpot, 6R probable jackpot,
Alternatively, if it is a 2R probability change jackpot, the process is terminated.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044IWS)
1125B, Y) or when a small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 044 IWS112).
(Y of 6B), which is neither the 10R probability variable hit, the 6R probability variable hit, nor the 2R probability variable hit (that is, becomes the 2R normal big hit), and the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed (Y in step 044IWS1127B) , Step 044 IWS1128B N)
First, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second forced symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 044IWS1130B)
).

By executing the processes of steps 044IWS1125B to S1129B, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the variation display of the first special symbol has a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the change display of the second special symbol which is a normal big hit (in this example, 2R normal big hit) is being executed, the change display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is changed. A large hit and a small hit are prevented from occurring at the same time with the second special symbol. In this case, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, if the variation display of the second special symbol is determined to be forcible, the variation of the decoration symbol is determined based on the second compulsory symbol determination designation command transmitted in step 044IWS1129B. Control is performed so as to forcibly display the missing symbol as a display result.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation is a large hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, Alternatively, if the display of the change of the second special symbol, which is a 2R probability change big hit, is being executed, the second special symbol change processing is terminated as it is (refer to Y of step 044IWS1128B). Based on the fact that the symbol variation display has become a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126),
It shifts to a small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 044 IWS1
At 120B, it is determined to be N, and the processing of steps 044IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the update of the second variable time timer of step 044IWS1122B is not performed.
Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol that is a certain variation big hit is being executed, the second variation time timer is set during the small hit game. Update is interrupted, and the display of the change of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is again changed to the accessory control normal processing (step S12).
0), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit is performed. Even in the case where there is, the second special symbol change processing is terminated as it is (see N of step 044IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and the change display of the second special symbol, which is a loss or a small hit, is being executed, the second change during the small hit game is also performed. When the updating of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hitting game is ended, the updating of the second variation time timer is restarted.

With the above configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time-saving state), the remaining second holding memory can be consumed, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol (to the right of the game area). A second KT state (small hit RUSH) is provided so as to provide a starting winning port which is not a variable winning ball apparatus.
In a gaming machine configured to shift to the normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end, the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed as described above may be applied. In this case, as the variation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol increases. However, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed. The occurrence frequency of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state can be suppressed, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent can be further suppressed. Can be.

FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 044IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
The PU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 044 IWS).
2011B). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (
Along with step 044IWS2012B), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stop symbol of the second special symbol (step 044IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designating command has been transmitted in step 044 IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, the second special symbol is forcibly set as the stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. The out-of-design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 044IWS2015B). If the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 1
03 sets a big hit start flag (step 044IWS2016B). Also, C
The PU 103 clears the second big hit flag (Step 044IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 0).
Along with the 44IWS2018B), control is performed to transmit a right-turn-on lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0444IWS2019B). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 044IWS2018B and S2019B, in the present example, the lighting of the right-hand display 26 is started when a big hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 044IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether the second small hit flag is set (step 044IWS2020B). If the second small hit flag is set, the effect control C
Control for transmitting the small hit start designation command to the PU 120 is performed (step 044IW).
S2021B). The CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 04).
4IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 044IWS2023B). If the special map time reduction flag is not set (that is,
If it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 044IWS2024B), and also performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 404). 044IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (step 044IWS2026B). Then, Step 044 IWS20
Move to 27B.

By executing the processing of steps 044IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening)
Is provided to the right of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hitting game, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, K
If it is in the T state, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be on. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 044 IWS2023B, the second process is performed during the KT state.
In the case of a small hit in the special symbol change display, the process of starting the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command in duplicate is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 044IWS2027B).

FIG. 10-24 is a normal accessory control process in the accessory control process (step S120).
FIG. In the accessory control normal processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 044IWS2101).
. If the jackpot start flag has not been set, the process ends.

If the big hit start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit start flag (step 044IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-open timer (step 044IWS2103), sets round 1 opening pattern data corresponding to the type of big hit (step 044IWS2104), and sets "1" in the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the big hit. Is set (step 044 IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 044IWS2106).

FIG. 10-25 shows a gate passage waiting process (step S12) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 1). In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step 044IWS25).
01). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal is input from the gate switch 21, the CPU 103, if set, resets the probability variable flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 044 IWS2502). Next, the CPU 10
No. 3 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 044IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 044IWS2).
504).

In the characteristic portion 044IW, the jackpot waiting process is executed, so that the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol, but the passing gate 41 is played. On condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21, it is configured to shift to a big hit game.

FIG. 10-26 is a process during opening of the big hit in the accessory control process (step S123).
FIG. In the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 044 IWS24).
01). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has won the special winning opening has been detected, the CPU 103 determines the winning number for counting the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (step 044 IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the V-region switch 044IW106 is in an ON state (step 044IWS2404). If the V-area switch 044IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V-area 044IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V-area 044IW104. (Step 044IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 044 IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the flow shifts to step 044IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening by 1 (step 044IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step 044 IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 044 IWS2406)
Or when the release time timer times out (Y of step 044 IWS2408)
First, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, and controls the special winning opening to be closed (step 044IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting a display command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0).
44 IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the round number counter by one (
Step 044 IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-big hit opening process (step 044IWS2412).

FIG. 10-27 is a jackpot end process in the accessory control process process (step S125).
It is a flowchart which shows. In the big hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a big hit end display timer is set (step 044IWS2200). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 shifts to step 044IWS2202. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit end display timer to the time during which the big hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time).
Is set (step 044IWS2201), and the process is terminated.

In step 044IWS2202, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 044IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 0).
44 IWS2203). If not, the process ends.

If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 044 IWS2203), the CPU
103 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 044 IWS2)
204). If the V winning flag has been set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 044IWS2205), sets the probable change flag, and shifts to the probable change state (high probability state) (step 044IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 10R certain jackpot or the 2R certain jackpot (step 044IWS2207). It is possible to determine whether or not it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 044IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 044IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is a 10R probability change hit or a 2R probability change hit, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 04).
4IWS2208). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2215. In addition, 10R
If the jackpot is a probable jackpot or a 2R probable jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if the game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability / low base state (high probability / 2KT state).

If it is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot (step 044IWS).
2209). It is to be noted that whether or not it is the 6R probability-change big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step 044IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process and step 0444IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If 6R probability change big hit, CPU10
3 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 044 IWS221).
0), and sets the special figure time-saving flag to shift to the KT state (step 044 IWS2)
211). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability change big hit, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of the 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (step 044 IWS25 of the gate passage waiting process).
02), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the big hit game based on the 6R probability change big hit is ended, the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variable display. Step 044IWSA of the first special symbol normal process and Step 044I of the second special symbol normal process
In step 694 IWS 70 A and step 044 IWS 70 B
No subtraction processing of the high base number counter is performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not the 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, if it is the 6R ordinary jackpot or the 2R ordinary jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 044IWS2212), and also sets the special figure time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 044 IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter.
Is set (step 044 IWS2214). Then, Step 044 IWS22
Move to 15. Therefore, in the case of a 6R ordinary jackpot or a 2R ordinary jackpot, the state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 044IWS2215).

FIG. 10-28 is a small hit end process in the accessory control process process (step S128).
It is a flowchart which shows. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a small hit end display timer is set (step 044IWS2300). If the small hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 shifts to step 044IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time).
Is set (step 044IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 044IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 044IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 0).
44 IWS 2303). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 044 IWS 2303), the CPU
103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 044 IWS)
2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is on (step 04).
4IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is on, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 044IWS2306), and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. The control is performed (step 044 IWS2307).

In this example, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on at the start of the small hit game (step 044IWS2).
023B to S2025B), and the processing of steps 044IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the lighting of the right-hand indicator 26 ends at the end of the small hitting game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 044IWS2308).

Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic portion 044IW will be described. Fig. 10-2
FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a manner of transition of the gaming state in the characteristic portion 044IW. First, in the characteristic part 044IW, a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)
In), the player performs a shooting operation of the game ball (left hit) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning prize mainly occurs in the first start winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, a 10R certain variable big hit, a 6R certain variable big hit, or a 6R normal large hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / The state transitions to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 044IWS2204 to S2).
208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. 6R in low probability / low base state
If a probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends, and The high probability / high base state is maintained until a jackpot occurs (step 0441)
WS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the jackpot game V
If the game ball does not enter the area 044IW104, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. If a 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the fluctuating display of 50 times is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

After shifting to the KT state (high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state, high-probability / low-base state), in this feature portion 044IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. To launch the game ball (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning prize mainly occurs in the second start winning opening, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the change display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R certain change big hit, a 6R certain change big hit, a 2R certain change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the V region 04 during the big hit game.
If the game ball enters the 4IW 104, the high probability / low base state (after the big hit game is completed)
The state transitions to the high probability / second KT state, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 044 IWS2204)
To S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the big hit game,
If the game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 6R probability variation big hit is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), and therefore, once high probability / high probability In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, high probability /
When the 2R normal big hit occurs in the high base state (high probability / first KT state), the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit is performed. The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the occurrence or the change display of 50 times is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the V area 04 during the big hit game.
If the game ball enters the 4IW 104, the high probability / low base state (after the big hit game is completed)
The state transitions to the high probability / second KT state, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 044 IWS2204)
To S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the big hit game,
If the game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. When a 2R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuating display of 50 times ends (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, this characteristic part 044I
In W, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 2R normal big hit is 3
Since it is 5% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit has occurred and the low probability / high base state has been established, if the 50-time variable display is completed without the occurrence of the next big hit, FIG. As shown, the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (steps 044IWS69A to S73).
A, S69B-S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability change big hit or a 2R probability change big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the V region 04 during the big hit game.
If the game ball enters the 4IW 104, the high probability / low base state (after the big hit game is completed)
The state transitions to the high probability / second KT state, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit is 15%. % (See FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. Also,
If a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / high The state shifts to the base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 044IWS2204 to S2206).
, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuating display of 50 times ends (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

In FIG. 10-29, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the first
Although the case where the special symbol variable display is executed has been described, there is a possibility that the special special symbol variable display is executed at a low rate. In this case, if a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game,
It will transition to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, 2R
Normally, when a big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. Will be maintained.

In FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability change jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (
(High probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability change jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (
(High probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

In FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability change jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (
(High probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

Next, the ordinary symbol processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the normal symbol process process. In the ordinary symbol processing, the game control microcomputer 10
0 (specifically, CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 044IWS5111), and sends a gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 044)
IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passage processing (step 044).
IWS5113).

In the characteristic unit 044IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 044IWS5111-S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In the characteristic portion 044IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Regardless of whether the command is passed or not, a gate passage designation command is transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 044 IWS according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag.
One of the processes shown in 5100 to S5104 is executed.

In this characteristic part 044IW, regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 044IWS5111, the gate switch passage processing of step 044IWS5113 is executed. Normally, the variable display of the symbols is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the normal symbol change display is executed. May not be executed.

Also, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the passing gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area, but the special symbol processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Symbol processing (see step S26)
Since the process is executed earlier than the above, the process of detecting the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operation region is performed, and then the process of detecting the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal start region is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 044IWS5113): The CPU 103 stores a gate passage memory counter (a counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the passage gate 41).
It is determined whether or not the count value (the number of stored gate passages) has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one.
In addition, the LED of the general-purpose reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination and storing the value in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gate passages.

Ordinary symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100): The CPU 103 is ready to start changing the ordinary symbol (for example, if the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is set to step 0444IWS5100).
When the value indicates WS5100, specifically, the normal symbol display 20 does not display the variable display of the normal symbol, and the variable based on the fact that the symbol hits the normal symbol display 20 and the symbol is derived and displayed. If it is not during the opening / closing operation of the winning ball device 6B), the value of the gate passage storage number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage storage number counter is confirmed.
If the number of stored gate passages is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not a stop symbol of a normal symbol is a hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set in the ordinary symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation process (step 044 IWS5101).

Ordinary symbol variation process (step 044 IWS 5101): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary symbol stopped symbol display time to the ordinary symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the ordinary symbol stop processing (step 044 IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 044 IWS5102): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether or not the stopped symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is set to the ordinary symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100).
(Specifically, “0”). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the ordinary symbol process timer is set to the time before the opening of the ordinary electric accessory, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step 044).
IWS5103) (specifically, “3”).

Normal electric accessory opening pre-process (step 044IWS5103): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out. To start the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “4”) indicating the ordinary electric auditors product activation process (step 044IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory actuation process (step 044IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures a normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 044IWS5100).

FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the number of stored gate passages is 0 by checking the count value of the number of stored gate passage counters (step 044IWS5121). If the number of stored gate passages is 0 (step 044 IWS)
5121, Y), the process ends as it is. If the number of stored gate passages is not 0 (N of step 044IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the random number value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = 1 (step 044IWS512).
2). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage number counter by one and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 044IWS5123). In other words, the random number for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = n-1. Store. Accordingly, the order in which the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective numbers of stored gate passages are always the same as the order of the number of stored gate passages = 1, 2, 3, 4. They match.

Next, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number (ordinary symbol hit determination random number value) by using a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol, and determines whether or not to hit the normal symbol. Is determined (step 044 IWS5127). Note that this feature 0
In the 44IW, in step 044IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly determines whether the state is the probable change state, the KT state, or the high base state.
It is determined to be a normal symbol per probability with a probability of / 100.

If the read normal symbol hit determination random number is within the hit range (if it is a hit) in step 044IWS5127, the CPU 103 sets a hit symbol as a display result (step 044IWS5128), and proceeds to step 044IWS5130. If the read normal symbol hit determination random number is not within the hit range (if it is a loss) in step 044IWS5127, the CPU 103 sets a loss symbol as a display result (step 044IWS5129), and proceeds to step 044IWS5130.

In step 044IWS5130, if the high base flag has been set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the ordinary symbol process timer (
Step 044 IWS5130 Y, S5131). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if the normal state or the second KT state, the normal symbol variation time is set to 1.0 second in the normal symbol process timer (N, N in step 044 IWS5130).
S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation processing (step 044IWS5101) (step 044IWS5133).

FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol stop processing (step 044 IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by one (step 044IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step 044IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 044 IWS3702), the process is terminated as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (step 0444IWS5127). Is confirmed) (step 044 IWS3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is determined by, for example, setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined as a hit in step 044IWS5127, and confirming whether or not the flag is set. Can be.

When it is determined that the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol is not a hit symbol but a lost symbol (N in step 044IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to the value indicating the ordinary symbol normal process (step 044IWS5100) (step 044IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step 044 IWS3708).

In step 044IWS3703, if the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 0444IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 044IWS3704). That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 044IWS3706). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 044IWS3705). .

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step 044 IWS5103) (step 0).
44 IWS3707).

FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step 044 IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory pre-opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by one (step 044IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step 044IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 044 IWS3802),
The process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before the opening of the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag has been set (step 044IWS3803). , When it is set, that is, in the first KT state, the normal electric accessory opening time is set to 5.
5 seconds is set in the ordinary symbol process timer (step 044 IWS3805). Also,
If the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 044IWS3804).

As described above, in the characteristic portion 044IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which the second prize opening is easier to start and win than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the method of controlling the second start winning opening so as to facilitate the start winning when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to the method shown by the characteristic portion 044IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened). The number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to two times in the first KT state while the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is set to one. In this case, in the first KT state, the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened can be increased to facilitate the start winning in the second starting winning opening.

In addition, for example, in the first KT state, compared to the normal state or the second KT state, the control to extend the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B described above and the variable winning ball device 6B May be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step 044).
IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the ordinary electric auditors product activation process (step 044IWS5104) (step 04).
4IWS3807).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIGS. 10-34 to 10-36 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step 044IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where they match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CP
U120 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (Step 044IWS)
612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 044 IWS).
613). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 044 IWS614)
The effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the RAM 1
It is stored in the set value storage area formed in the storage 22 (step 044 IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a fluctuation pattern command (step 044 IWS6
16), effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 044IWS617).
). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 044 IWS61).
8).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 044 IWS6)
19), The effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 044IWS620).
).

If the received effect control command is any one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (the first symbol confirmation designation command, the second symbol confirmation designation command, the first forced symbol confirmation designation command, the second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 044IWS621) ), Effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 0).
44 IWS622). For example, when a first symbol confirmation designation command is received, a first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. In addition, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 044 IWS)
623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 044 IWS 624). In addition, effect control CPU1
20 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 044 IWS625)
).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 044 IWS)
626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the right-hand display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 044IWS627). In addition, effect control CPU1
20 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 044 IWS628)
).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 044 IWS 624 and S 627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 044 IWS)
629), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 044IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 044 IWS)
631), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 044IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a right-turn lighting start designation command (step 044I)
WS633), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right strike notification LED 37 (step 044 IWS 634).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 044I)
WS635), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the lighting of the right strike notification LED 37 (step 044IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a low-precision / non-KT background designation command (step 044)
IWS 637), effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a background image on image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a blue background image) according to the low probability / non-KT state (step 044 IWS 638). If set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 044IWS).
639).

If the received effect control command is a low-precision / first KT background designation command (step 04)
4IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a background image on the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a green background image) according to the low probability / first KT state (for example, a green background image).
Step 044 IWS641). The effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 044IWS642), and if it is set, the high probability state flag indicating the high probability state and the second KT state indicating the second KT state. The 2KT state flag is reset (step 044 IWS643).

If the received effect control command is a high accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 04)
4IWS 644), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a background image on the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a yellow background image) according to the high probability / first KT state (for example, yellow background image).
Step 044 IWS645). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 044IWS646), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 044IWS647).

If the received effect control command is a high accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 04)
4IWS648), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display the background image on the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a red background image) corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (see FIG. 4IWS648).
Step 044 IWS 649). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 044IWS650), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 044IWS651).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 044IW)
S652), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the small hit continuous prize ball number counter for counting the prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state (S652). Step 044 IWS653). Then, the effect control CPU 120 generates the small hit in the second KT state in the second KT state during the continuous hit based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition. Small win continuous prize ball number display 1 showing the prize ball number
Is displayed, control is performed to update the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 (step 044).
IWS654).

In this example, the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is started when a 10R certain-variable big hit or a 2R certain-variable big hit occurs during the normal state or the first KT state. When the big hit occurs (that is, when the second KT state is ended), the display is ended.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than any threshold value (step 044 IWS655). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than one of the threshold values, the effect control C
The PU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 according to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition (step 044IWS656).
For example, if the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball counter after the addition is 1000 or 1005, 1010, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 in the prize at the current big winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “1000OVER” as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 044I)
WS657), effect control CPU 120 increments the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter by 10 (step 044IWS658). Next, based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition, if the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 determines that The control for updating the middle prize ball number display 1 is performed (step 044IWS659).

Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or greater than any threshold value (step 044IWS660). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than one of the threshold values, the effect control C
The PU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition (step 044IWS661).
For example, if the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1,000 in the current prize winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and a small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “1000OVER” as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

In this example, the case where the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is updated or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 is displayed based on winning in the special winning opening or the special winning opening is shown. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even when a winning in the general winning opening 10 occurs during the consecutive small winnings in the second KT state, a value corresponding to the number of awarding balls for winning in the general winning opening 10 is set to the number of consecutive small winning awards. The value may be added to the counter to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 may be displayed.

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120
A process for storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command is executed (step 044IWS662). And step 04
The process proceeds to 4IWS611.

FIG. 10-37 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start wait processing, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (step 044IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined, for example, by setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). Step 044 IWS811
Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command has been received, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag has been set (step 044I).
WS 812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if the state is not the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 044 IWS813). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. Can be determined by confirming whether If it is not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, to execute the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated. If the variation display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 12
0 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 044IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (ie,
In the case of the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (step 044IWS814). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the second special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. Can be determined by confirming whether Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is,
If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated. When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 044IWS816).

By executing the process of steps 044IWS812 to S815, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when the non-KT state is set, the display of the decoration symbol on the image display device 5 is changed corresponding to the display of the first special symbol. When the display is in the KT state, the decorative display is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state,
Even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed in the non-KT state.

FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 044IWS920). Note that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area designating the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a small hit (step 044IWS921). Note that whether or not the current fluctuation display is a small hit is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. Can be determined. If it is a small hit change, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach out-of-reach symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 044IWS922).

As described above, in the present example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, only the small hit A can be obtained. Can hardly be expected to win. Therefore, in the present example, when the process of Steps 044IWS920 to S922 is executed and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs,
By forcibly stopping and displaying the non-reach out-of-reach symbol, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations.

In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol (N in step 044IWS920) or in the case of not a small hit variation (N in step 044IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 stops the decoration symbol according to the variation display result. Is determined (step 044 IWS923).
. In step 044 IWS 923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of position), only the out-of-left design or the right-and-left decoration design in which the left-middle-right decorative design does not completely match is displayed. The combination of the matched reach-losing symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 10R certain-variable big hit), a combination of the symbols whose left middle right decoration symbol is the symbol "7" among the odd symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R probability variable big hit), a combination of symbols in which the decoration symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd symbols other than “7” is determined. Also, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability change is a big hit), a combination of the symbols including the special symbol (the symbol “R” in this example) is determined. . When a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are arranged in even-numbered symbols. To determine. When the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of decorative symbols of a small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of step (step 044IWS924). It should be noted that whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of order is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by If it is not a deviation change, the process directly proceeds to step 044IWS928. If it is outlier fluctuation (Y in step 044IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the setting value suggestion effect indicating the currently set value. (Step 044 IWS925).

In step 044 IWS 925, effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 044 IWS 615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestive effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestive effect. Determine the presence and type of value suggestion effect.

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-39, the setting value suggestion effect determination table has no setting value suggestion effect,
The determination values are assigned to the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value suggestion effect B, the setting value suggestion effect C, the setting value suggestion effect D, the setting value suggestion effect E, and the setting value suggestion effect F.

The setting value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is an effect that is executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. 10-39, the set value “2”. Is the highest execution ratio.
The setting value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. The setting value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. The setting value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. The set value suggestion effect F is, for example,
This is an effect performed in a manner in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-39, the execution ratio is the highest when the set value is “6”. .

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag has been set (step 044 IWS 926). If the second KT state flag has not been set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the flow directly proceeds to step 044IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 044 IWS926),
That is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second KT state (small hit R
A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and the type of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect indicating that the USH is to be continued is executed (step 044IWS92).
7).

FIG. 10-40 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-40, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table includes no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and a small hit R.
A determination value is assigned to each of the USH continuation suggestion effects B. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 in a blue display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 40, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is “2”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is provided. Is the next highest, and when the set value is “3”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is even higher, and when the set value is “4”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect execution ratio Is the next highest, and when the set value is “5”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest. When the set value is “6”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It is lower.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 40, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest, and when the set value is “6”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is performed.
Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot probability is the lowest, and when the set value is “6”, the jackpot probability is the highest. Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value “1” is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the degree of continuous expectation is high), and the setting value “6”. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of expected continuation is low).
Therefore, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is “6”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Since the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, the second
Expectation that the KT state (small hit RUSH) continues can be increased.

As described above, the continuation expectation degree of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is an expectation degree that the control period to the second KT state becomes longer without occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues can be further increased.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, and the execution of the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. Has set value suggestion effects and small hit RUSH
A process table corresponding to the continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 044IWS928).

Next, effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of process data 1 in the process table selected in step 044IWS928 as the process timer and starts the process timer (step 044IWS929). Then, the effect control CPU 120 renders the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speaker 8L) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1).
, 8R) (step 044IWS930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Also, the speaker 8L,
A control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 to output the audio from the 8R.

When the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined, the decoration is performed by executing the step 044 IWS 930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 044 IWS 928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the change display of the symbol (during the change of the loss).

If it is determined that the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step 044 IWS.
By executing the step 044 IWS 930 and the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in accordance with the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in 928, during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the loss variation during the second KT state) ), A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decoration symbol variation time timer and starts the decoration symbol variation time timer (step 044IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 044IWS932).

FIG. 10-41 shows the effect processing during variable display in the effect control process (step S17).
It is a flowchart which shows 2). In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 12
In the case of 0, first, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1 (step 044 IWS8101).
), The value of the decorative symbol variation time timer is decremented by 1 (step 044IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 044 IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 044 IWS8104). Further, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data which are set next (step 044IWS8105).

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 044IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, (1) Whether the confirmation command reception flag is set is confirmed (step 044 IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control C
The PU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the wait process per special figure (step S173) (step 044IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 044 IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol determination designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 044IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a lost symbol (step 044IWS8109). And effect control CPU120,
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S173) (step 044IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 044 IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, 2) is confirmed (step 044 IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the wait process per special figure (step S173) (step 044IWS8114).
).

If the second symbol confirmation specifying command has not been received, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second compulsory symbol confirmation specifying command has been received (for example, whether the second compulsory confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 044 IWS8112). If the second compulsory symbol determination designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 044IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a lost symbol (step 044IWS8113). And effect control CPU120,
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the waiting process per special figure (step S173) (step 044IWS8114).

If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 044IWS8108, or if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 044IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 sets the decoration symbol variation time timer. It is determined whether or not has timed out (step 044 IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for a standby effect (step 044IWS8116). Then, effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 044IWS8117).

In this example, as described above, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, and a certain variation big hit, is being executed. During the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and when the change display of the second special symbol which is a loss, a small hit, and a probability change big hit is being executed, during the small hit game, Then, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decoration symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 044 IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command means that
In this manner, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing in steps 044IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and thereafter, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally the special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol ends. The “stand-by effect” is, for example, an effect in which the decorative pattern in the middle left and right on the image display device 5 swings or slightly fluctuates to temporarily stop.

In addition, for example, when the image display device 5 also executes a variable display such as a system small symbol or a fourth symbol, the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special time timer is interrupted. When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously performed, the variable display of the system small symbol and the fourth symbol is also continuously performed. When the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit waiting processing (step S173) in the effect control process processing. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 044IWS).
9701). If the stop symbol display flag 1 has been set, step 044 IWS970
Move to 6. In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 044IWS9705.
Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the big hit effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed, but the big hit effect has not been executed yet. Without executing, the flow shifts to step 044IWS9706.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 044 IWS9702). Stop symbol display flag 2
If is set, the flow shifts to step 044 IWS9716. This feature 044I
In the case of W, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, step 044IW
In S9715, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol is definitely displayed, but the small hit effect has not yet been performed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 044IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 044IWS9716 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 stops the left-middle-right decorative symbol being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5 (losing symbol, big hit symbol). , A small hit symbol) is determined (step 044IWS9703). In addition, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command or the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the process of replacing with a shifted symbol is executed in steps 044IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CP is executed in step 044IWS9703.
U120 performs control to confirm and display the missing symbol.

When the big hit symbol is determined and displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (Y in step 044IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 044IWS9705).

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 044IWS9706). If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 044).
IWS 9707).

Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the type of jackpot of the jackpot that has occurred this time is 10R probability variable jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot (step 044IWS9708).
It should be noted that whether the jackpot type is the 10R probability variable hit or the 2R probability variable hit is determined, for example, by confirming whether the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command or the display result 5 designation command. it can. If it is a 10R probability change jackpot or a 2R probability change hit, the process directly proceeds to step 044IWS9710.

If neither the 10R-probable jackpot nor the 2R-probable jackpot is used, it means that the second KT state is ended after the end of the current big hit game if the second KT state is in progress. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits occurring in the second KT state and the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter to 0.
It is cleared (step 044 IWS 9709).

Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 044IWS9710). Next, effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 044IWS9711), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1), a rendering device (image display device 5 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and speakers 8L and 8R as rendering components)
) Is executed (step 044 IWS9712).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the big hit effect process (step S176) (step 044IWS9713).

If the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (N in step 044IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (Y in step 044IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 044 IWS9715).

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command has been received (step 044IWS9716). If the small hit start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 044).
IWS 9717).

Next, effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step 044IWS9718). Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state on the image display device 5 based on the value of the updated small hit continuous number counter. Then, control is performed to update the small hit continuous number display 1 (step 044IWS9719).

In this example, the small hit continuous number display 1 is started when a 10R certain variable big hit or a 2R certain variable big hit occurs during the normal state or the first KT state. The display is terminated when the occurrence has occurred (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit consecutive number counter after the addition is any one of the thresholds (step 044 IWS9720). If the value of the small hit continuous number counter after the addition is any of the threshold values, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to execute Control for displaying the display 2 is performed (step 044 IWS9721). For example, if the value of the small hit consecutive number counter after addition is 10, it means that the small hit consecutive number has reached 10 times with the occurrence of the current small hit, and the threshold "10" is reached. It is determined that the number of small hits has been reached, and the small hit continuous number display 2 indicating that the number of small hits has reached 10 times is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “10COMBO” as the small hit continuous number display 2.

Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit effect (step 044IWS9722). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 044IWS9723), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1), a rendering device (image display device 5 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and speakers 8L and 8R as rendering components)
) Is executed (step 044 IWS9724).

Then, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the small hit effect effect processing (step S174) (step 044IWS9725).

If the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 044 IWS 9703 (that is, if a missing symbol is displayed) (N in step 044 IWS 9704 and N in step 044 IWS 9714), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 044IWS9726).

Next, a description will be given of an effect mode of the effect executed in the present feature unit 044IW. First, the effect of the setting value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-44 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of the setting value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute a setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative symbol that is to be lost. As shown in FIG. 10-44 (A), the image display device 5
During execution of the variation display of the left-center-right decoration symbol, when the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is reached, as shown in FIGS. A set value suggestion effect is executed.

In the present example, as shown in FIGS. 10-44 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed in a manner in which the predetermined character images 044IW001, 044IW002, and 044IW003 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B1), the predetermined character image 044IW001 is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5 and set. A value suggestion effect is performed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B2), the predetermined character image 044IW00 is displayed in yellow on the image display device 5.
A setting value suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which 2 is displayed. Also, for example, a set value suggestion effect E
Is performed, a setting value suggestion effect is executed in a manner in which the predetermined character image 044IW003 is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B3).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-44, the case where the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value suggestion effect C, and the setting value suggestion effect E are executed is shown. Indicates a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color when a set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when a set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the display color.

In this example, which set value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern to be lost and the set value suggestion effect is executed. Can be expected.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production will be described. FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, the second K
The small hit RU in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is lost during the T state (during the small hit RUSH)
An H continuation suggestion effect can be executed.

In the present example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), for example, a character display 044IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed that it is recognizable. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), when the variation display of the left-middle-right decoration symbol is performed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is performed. Then, FIG. 10-4
As shown in FIGS. 5 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-45 (B1) and (B2), a small hit RUSH is performed in a manner in which predetermined effect images 044IW005 and 044IW006 are displayed on the image display device 5.
A continuation suggestion effect is executed. In this example, the predetermined effect image 444IW005,044
A case where an image of a racing car is displayed as IW006 is shown. in this case,
For example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B1), the small effect is displayed by displaying the predetermined effect image 044IW005 in a blue display color on the image display device 5. A RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Also, for example, a small hit RU
When performing the SH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is performed by displaying the predetermined effect image 044IW005 in a red display color on the image display device 5. Is executed.

In the present example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is performed by performing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variation display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or an effect image of any display color is displayed. Depending on whether the effect is executed, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, a display mode of right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 10-46 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display mode of right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the first special symbol has a big hit or the second special symbol has been changed and the variable display has been executed, a big hit is played. As shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 044IWS2018A and S2018B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the right-handed notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS).
2019A, S2019B, and S634). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the effect control CPU 120 causes a right-handed display 04
4IW007 is displayed (see step 044IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, during the small hit game, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (2)). The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the CPU 103 (step 044 IWS2).
024B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-turn lighting start command, FIG.
0-46 (2), the right control LED 3
7 is turned on (see steps 044IWS2025B and S634). However, unlike during the big hit game, the right-handed display 044IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (2).

On the other hand, in the present example, if a small hit has been made in the variable display of the first special symbol, FIG.
As shown in 3), during the small hitting game, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on and the right-handed notification LED is provided.
37 is not turned on, and right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is performed.
Is not displayed.

Next, a description will be given of the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed. FIG. 10-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is changed to a certain variation big hit (in this example, 10R).
In the case of a jackpot change that results in a probability change jackpot or a 6R probability change jackpot, FIG.
As shown in A), the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step 044 IWS1128A Y).

On the other hand, if the change display of the first special symbol is a big hit change that is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-47 (B). When this is done, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (step 0).
N of 44IWS1128A, see step 044IWS1129A).

In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (C), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step N44 IWS1127A N).

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is changed to a certain variable big hit (in this example, 10R).
In the case of a jackpot change that is a probability change jackpot, a 6R probability change jackpot, or a 2R probability change hit), as shown in FIG. The display continues. Specifically, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted during the small hit game, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1).
120B, see step Y44 IWS1128B Y).

On the other hand, if the change display of the second special symbol is a big hit change that is a normal big hit (in this example, a 2R normal big hit), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. When this is done, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (step 0).
N of 44IWS1128B, see step 044IWS1129B).

In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (F), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted during the small hit game, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, Step N44 IWS1127B N).

The control method in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a modification of the control method in a case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being performed.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-48 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (Step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 10-48, steps 044IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1127A is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 10-19, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 044IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist.

In the first modification, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
103 shifts to the process of step S1129A as it is, and performs control to transmit the first forced symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A).
. In FIG. 10-48, the process of step 044 IWS1130A is the same as that of FIG.
This is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-49 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the first modification. In FIG. 10-49, the processes of steps 044IWS1120B to S1127B are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the first modification, the determination process of step 044IWS1128B shown in FIG. .

In the first modification, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
103 shifts to the process of step S1129B as it is, and performs control to transmit the second forced symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129B).
. Note that in FIG. 10-49, the process of step 044 IWS1130B is the same as that of FIG.
This is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the one special symbol in the first modification.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the first special symbol a big hit variation that becomes a probable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the change display of the first special symbol is also forcibly displayed as a missing symbol. Stop display is performed (N of step 044IWS1127A, step 044IWS112
9A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step N44 IWS1127A N).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variable display of the second special symbol a big hit change that results in a probable variable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the change display of the second special symbol is also forcibly changed to a lost symbol. Stop display is performed (N of step 044WS1127B, step 044WS12112).
9B).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (D), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted during the small hit game, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, Step N44 IWS1127B N).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-51 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (Step S112A) in the second modification. In FIG. 10-51, steps 044IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1126A is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 10-19, but in the second modification, the processing of step 044IWS1127C is included in place of the determination processing of steps 044IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19. .

In the second modification, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-51, the process of step 044IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-52 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the second modification. In FIG. 10-52, the processing of steps 044IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22. Alternatively, step 044I
WS1127D processing is included.

In the second modification, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-52, the process of step 044IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram for describing the control of the variable display when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the one special symbol in the second modification.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the first special symbol a big hit variation that becomes a probable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (A), the change display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In particular,
During the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step 044 IWS1
127C, Y).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol (see N of Step 044IWS1127C, Step 044IWS1129A).
.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variable display of the second special symbol a big hit change that results in a probable variable big hit? Irrespective of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (C), the change display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In particular,
During the small hit game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hit game ends, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, Step 044 IWS1
127D, Y).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (D), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol (see N of Step 044IWS1127D and Step 044IWS1129B).
.

In addition, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed, for example, besides the method shown in the first and second modifications, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the forcible stop is stopped, while the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes the 10R probability variable hit, the forcible stop is stopped, while the 2R probability variable hit is obtained. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is lost, It may be configured such that the forced stop is performed regardless of the small hit change or the big hit change. With such a configuration, in this example, if the fluctuating display is completed 50 times in the low probability / high base state, the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (see FIG. 10-29).
When the change display of 0 times is completed and the state is shifted to the low probability / low base state, the second hold storage is set to 1 to 4
If there is a large number of pieces of stored data, and there is a second pending storage that becomes a big hit, the forced off stop can prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. Particularly, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in the present example, the normal state (low probability /
By performing a right-hand operation in the low base state), the second start winning opening which is easy to start winning is made a winning start and the first special winning opening is made a winning display while the second special symbol is changed and displayed. (1) A capture method in which a special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner is also possible, but it is effective as a measure for preventing such a capture method.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the control for forcibly displaying the unsuccessful symbols is performed by the same control in the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of performing the variable display of the second special symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 10-47) has been described, different control may be performed. Fig. 10-
54 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the third modification. In the third modification, the first special symbol change process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-54, the processing of steps 044 IWS1120B to S1125B is the same as that of FIG.
-22, but the modification 3 does not include the determination processing of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. Therefore, Modification 3
If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 0).
In 44IWS1125B, the CPU 103 terminates the process.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for describing the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol in the third modification.

As shown in FIGS. 10-55 (A) and (C), in the third modification, during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a loss, a small hit, and a certain variation big hit, the small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-47 (A) and (C). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (D) and (F), during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss, a small hit, and a large variation, the small hit symbol stops in the variation display of the first special symbol. When displayed, FIG. 10-47 (D), (F)
Similarly to the above, even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B), in the third modification, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which usually becomes a big hit. In FIG. 10, as in the case of FIG. 10-47 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (E), in the third modification, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which usually becomes a big hit. In contrast to FIG. 10-47 (E), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-55, in the third modification, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly performed with the missing symbol between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. The control for stop display is different.

In the third modification, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which normally becomes a big hit, the forced loss stop is performed, while the normal large hit is stopped. In the case where the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display is continued, but this is only an example. Absent. For example, conversely, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which normally becomes the big hit, the variation display is continued, If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to stop forcibly without the change. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a big hit (regardless of whether the probability is a big hit or a normal big hit), the forced off is performed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol change display during the execution of the change display of the second special symbol which becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability change big hit or a normal big hit), The display may be continued. In such a case, the control for forcibly stopping the shift may be different between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-56 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (Step S112A) in the fourth modification. In FIG. 10-56, steps 044IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1128A is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 10-19.

In the modified example 4, when the variation display of the first special symbol which is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 6R probability variable jackpot at step 044IWS1128A (that is, becomes the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag to “0”. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 044 IWS1131A). If the probable change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probable change state), the process ends. If the probable change flag is set (that is, if the probable change state is set), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). Note that the process of step 044 IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, by executing the determination process of step 044 IWS 1131A, during the variation display of the first special symbol that normally becomes a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, The variation display of the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol when the certain variation state is being performed. On the other hand, even during the change display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, if not in the probable change state, the change display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-57 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the fourth modification. In FIG. 10-57, the processing of steps 044IWS1120B to S1128B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the modified example 4, in step 044 IWS1128B, the first jackpot is not any of the 10R jackpot, the 6R jackpot, and the 2R jackpot (ie, the 2R regular jackpot).
When the special symbol change display is being executed, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the probable change flag is set (step 044IWS1131B). If the probable change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probable change state), the process ends. If the probable change flag is set (that is, if the probable change state is set), the CPU 103 sets the effect control C
Control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the PU 120 is performed (step 044IW).
S1129B). Note that the process of step 044 IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the fourth modification, by executing the determination process of step 044IWS1131B, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which usually becomes a big hit, The variation display of the second special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol when the positive variation state is being performed. On the other hand, even during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol which usually becomes a big hit, if the small change symbol is not in the probable change state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

In the fourth modification, whether or not the probable change flag is set (whether or not the probable change state is set)
However, the present invention is not limited to such a case in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display in a missing symbol. For example, it may be configured to perform control for forcibly stopping and displaying a missing symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Also, for example, a high probability /
Only when the low base state is set (the high probability flag is on and the high base flag is off), the control for forcibly stopping the display with the off symbol may be performed. So in some form,
Any configuration may be used as long as it is configured to perform control for forcibly stopping and displaying a missing symbol according to the current game state.

In addition, as described above, when the control is performed such that the stop display is forcibly performed in the off symbol only in the high probability / low base state, the change display of one of the identification information prevents a normal big hit, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the variable display can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of (i), it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). The advantage for the player is higher than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game). In addition, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is not derived and displayed based on the derived display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not displayed). (2) The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed. Further, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a lost symbol). Will be forcibly stopped). Therefore, control in consideration of the advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

Specifically, in the case where a normal large hit (non-probable variable big hit) is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information despite the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the positive change state, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probable change state ends immediately, and there is a possibility that interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, if a variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the one piece of identification information is forcibly and uniformly displayed and stopped (forced release), even a variable display that results in a probability of a large hit is regarded as a forced release. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) decreases, which is not preferable. Therefore, in the present characteristic part 044IW, the variable display which becomes a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) is forcibly deviated, while the variable display which becomes a positive big hit is changed by extending the fluctuation (interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time). In this way, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing a decrease in the game value given to the player.

In this example, as a mode of “not stopping the variable display of one identification information”, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example,
The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been interrupted after the small hit game, may be resumed. Good. It is sufficient if the variable display is not completely stopped in such a form.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) in a special state is easily provided. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is easily given in a special state, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the state is different from the advantageous state, and the non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state compared to a low probability state. Further, based on the fact that the first specific display result has been derived and displayed, control is performed in a specific state (for example, control is performed after a big hit game based on a probable variable big hit is completed), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, the state is controlled to the non-specific state (for example, the state is not controlled to the positive change state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). Therefore, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the state is different from the advantageous state, and the non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state compared to a low probability state. In addition, when controlled in an advantageous state, the specific area (
For example, a specific state can be controlled based on a game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through the V region 044IW104). Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the display is controlled to be in an advantageous state. (See FIGS. 10-11). Therefore, control can be realized in consideration of whether the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed in any of the case where the variable display of the first identification information is performed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is performed ( 10-3 and 10-4). In addition, during execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the first identification information is derived and displayed based on the variable display of the second identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-55 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the second identification information, The control for deriving and displaying the variable display with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIG. 10-55 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the state is different from the advantageous state, and the non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state compared to a low probability state. Further, the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the specific state, and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During the execution of, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result based on the special display result derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information (FIGS. 10-56 and 10-). 57). Further, when being controlled to the non-specific state, during the execution of the variable display of the one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57). ). Therefore, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

Also, according to the present characteristic portion 044IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is entered based on the entry of the game medium (for example, the game ball) into the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening). ) Can be executed, and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is executed based on the game medium entering the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can change between a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to enter. Ball device 17). In addition, after any one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variably displayed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player.
And a special state having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a small hitting game state). When the state is controlled to the special state, the variable means is controlled to the first state. Also,
The first start area is provided so that a game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, a left area of the game area) among the movement paths on which the game medium can move, is provided, and the variable means is configured to select a specific path from the movement paths. (For example, a game medium moving in a right area of the game area) is provided so as to be able to enter. Also, a specific notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to a specific route (for example, FIG. 10-46 (1)
) And (2) can be executed, and when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the specific notification is not executed (for example, FIG. 10-46 ( 3
)reference). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the feature section 044IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be changed. Is configured such that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than that of the small hit type on the second special symbol side, and the second special symbol is displayed when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. In the case where the variation display of the symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, if the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol having a low winning ratio (advantage), substantially, Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player will uselessly hit the game ball, and rather, will give an unfavorable firing promotion notification, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, while the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, the right hit notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's useless beating, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, the information relating to the variable display of the first identification information can be stored as the temporary storage, the first storage means (for example, the first storage buffer), and the variable display of the second identification information. And a second hold storage unit (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the hold as a hold storage. Also, the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second
When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the identification information, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) and the variable display of the first identification information is displayed. As a result or a variable display of the second identification information, a special display result (
For example, when a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result at a high frequency. In addition, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are performed in parallel, based on the special display result being derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved storage can be smoothly consumed.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 044IW, a predetermined value can be given when controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on a prize of a game ball to a special winning opening), and When controlled to be in an advantageous state, a value higher than a predetermined value can be given (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on a prize of a game ball to a special winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-46 (1) and (2)) and a visual recognition more than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute highly specific second specific notification (for example, right-handed display 044IW007 shown in FIG. 10-46 (1)). When controlled to be in the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (
When the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is performed, the first specific notification is performed and the second specific notification is not performed (see FIG. 10-46 (1)). (2)
reference). Therefore, the notification corresponding to the value that can be given can be realized.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control a plurality of kinds of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, when the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed, it is more advantageous than when the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Control is performed to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-46 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the advantage of the player.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. Further, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode between when the special state is controlled and when the special state is not controlled (
For example, when the change display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

According to the characteristic portion 044IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a restriction piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided upstream of the variable means on the specific route.
Is provided. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the target from being targeted at the timing at which the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is performed in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the measures for capturing the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a configuration is provided in which a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right is provided as a delay unit on the upstream side of the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area. May be.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and an effect based on information from the game control means. Effect control means for controlling (for example, effect control CPU 120
). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) for performing the predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load on the effect control means.

In the present example, the right strike notification is executed during the big hit game regardless of whether the first special symbol change display is executed or the second special symbol change display is executed. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device (right large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning prize ball device (right large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the gaming area. If a big hit is found in the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if a big hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. In the case of applying to a gaming machine configured as described above, if a large hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right strike notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case of a big hit, a right strike notification may not be executed during the big hit game. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, if a large hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left strike notification may be executed during the big hit game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right large winning opening) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, in the event of a big hit in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, by executing a left hit notification during the big hit game, it is possible to suppress the player from erroneously performing a right hit operation. And the disadvantage of the player can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where the right strike notification is executed even during the KT state has been described. The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to a gaming machine provided on the left side of the gaming area, a right strike notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, and the time reduction state. Is also good.

In the present example, the right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even during the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH), when the first variable display after the big hit game is executed, in addition to the lighting of the right-hand indicator 26 and the right-hand notification LED 37, The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the big hit game, the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LE
Right-handed display 044IW0 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to lighting of D37.
07 may be displayed to execute right-handed notification.

In the present example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in the present example. For example, apart from the right-handed display 044IW007 of a relatively large size as shown in FIG. , The right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, the small hit control method is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning prize ball devices are provided, and a special variable winning prize ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is different depending on the type of the small hit, and a small special hit is displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol. The selection rate of the small hit type may be configured to be different between the case of the small hit and the case of the small hit in the change display of the second special symbol. In this case, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select a small hit type (or a small hit type in an open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hitting type opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls (or the small hitting type in an opening mode having a high winning rate) is easily selected. May be configured.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the change display of the second special symbol, a right strike is notified during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-46 (2)), and the change display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit has occurred, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-46 (3)), but a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, in the case where a small hit occurs due to the change display of the second special symbol being executed in a situation where the left hit operation is to be performed in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. May be.

Further, according to the present feature unit 044IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player. It is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. Also, using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for a large hit determination, a determination value for a small hit determination),
Determine the display result of the variable display. Further, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state.
In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value for determining to derive and display (for example, a determination value for small hit determination). In addition, a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting value “1”
"To" 6 "). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common between the case where control is performed in the non-specific state and the case where control is performed in the specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability or the classification distribution changes according to the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball-out performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling property may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the characteristic part 044IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is prevented from becoming excessively large. And prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

Also, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display state of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state, appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

Also, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, as the special state, the first special state (for example, the first K
(T state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

In addition, according to the feature portion 044IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-45) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

Also, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, the small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute a setting value suggestion effect indicating the setting value (for example, the setting value suggestion effect illustrated in FIGS. 10-44). Therefore, by executing the set value suggestion effect, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the setting value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the range is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during a big hit game or a small hit game, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or a setting value suggestion effect may be executed, and various modes are conceivable.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control a plurality of kinds of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. The number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

Specifically, in the present characteristic part 044IW, the number of special type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the small hit type is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depends on the set value excessively. This prevents the gambling from becoming too large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the assignment of the small hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown, The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the determination rate of the small hit type may be made different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, a 6R normal variable hit, a 2R probability variable hit, and a 2R normal variable hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the big hit type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

Specifically, in the present characteristic part 044IW, the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value by setting the number of advantageous type determination values to be common regardless of the set value (commonly assigning the jackpot type). And prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the assignment of the big hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be made different depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the fluctuation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

More specifically, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value becomes excessive. It prevents the gambling from becoming too large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control changes, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in elements other than the big hit lottery. Although the degree (difference in ball performance) greatly differs, which is not preferable, the characteristic portion 044IW uses a common selection ratio of the variation pattern regardless of the set value.
We are trying to avoid such problems.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, a case is shown in which the assignment of the variation pattern is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, by changing the determination ratio of the variation pattern depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency is varied depending on the set value. You may comprise so that a difference may exist in an advantage according to a value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 044IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player. It is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. Also, using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for a large hit determination, a determination value for a small hit determination),
Determine the display result of the variable display. The determination value includes a specific determination value for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for a big hit determination).
And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining that a special display result is to be derived and displayed as a variable display display result, and a specific display result and a special display result as variable display results And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for out-of-position determination) for determining that a predetermined display result is different from the predetermined display result. In addition, a plurality of setting values (the number of
For example, it can be set to any one of the set values “1” to “6”). The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination values are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs according to the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable state) and a specific state (for example, a probable state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state.
Further, the predetermined determination values are included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (FIG. 10C).
And FIG. 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). This can be performed in parallel with the variable display.) Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

In addition, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result. In addition, when a variable display in which a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) is derived and displayed is executed while being controlled to the special state, a setting value suggestion effect that suggests a setting value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-44). Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the set value suggestion effect, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

Also, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state is displayed.
Can be controlled. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value for determining to derive and display (for example, a determination value for small hit determination). Also, a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting value “1”)
To “6”). The number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate monotonousness of the game while realizing appropriate game characteristics.

In the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forcible stoppage), the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display Could not be realized. Therefore, this feature part 044
For the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine shown in (Means A1) to (Means A6) below is also provided for the IW. It has been disclosed.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, CPU
103) and a special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result. Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which can be controlled to the state (state).
部分 S128), and the variable display execution means performs special display in the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information during the variable display of the other identification information. On the basis of the derived display of the display result, the first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, The second control (for example, the out-of-position) in which the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed) and the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, the out-of-position symbol) And stopping the display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missing symbol). Which of the first control and the second control is executed depends on the display result displayed (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, the CPU 103) determines the result of the determination in steps 044IWS1128A and S1128B). Steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed, for example, in Modification Example 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps 044IWS1127A, S1130A, and S1129B based on the determination results of Steps 044IWS1127A and S1127B. , S1130B, for example, in Modification Example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Step 044 IWS1130. , Step by the determination result of S1130D 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, executes S1130B.) It is characterized. According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In the means A1, a special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, step 044 in the CPU 103)
(A portion that executes the IWS 2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or A2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (
For example, there is a probability-variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling to a specific state that is easily controlled (for example, a high probability state (probable change state))
In which step 044 IWS2206 is executed), and the specific state control means includes:
When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the specific state (for example, after the big hit game based on the probability changing big hit is completed), the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured so as to be controlled based on the non-specific state (for example, the state is not controlled to be in the positive change state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to A3, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probability variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), which is different from the advantageous state and compared with the non-specific state (for example, low probability state). State control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically,
The CPU 103) includes a portion for executing step 044IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls the specific region (for example, the V region 044IW1) when controlled to the advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)).
Executes steps 044 IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
In the case where the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific region at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the open period of the V-region open / close plate 044IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. In the big hit game, the opening period of the V-region open / close plate 044IW101 is extremely short.) According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probable change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The variable display execution means performs the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. In any case of performing the display, the special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS64A and S64B. -3, refer to FIG. 10-4.), The variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. Based on the derived display of the result, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) When N is determined in the step I441WS1128A, steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A are executed.
)reference. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is performed, the second identification information is displayed. (For example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B. 10-54, FIG. 10-5
See 5 (E). ). According to such a configuration, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means A6) In any one of the means A1 to A5, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probable change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The advantage for the player is higher than the above (for example, the state is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game), the state is different from the advantageous state, and compared with the non-specific state (for example, the low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, C
PU104), the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the specific state is controlled. During execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, the CPU 103) determines in step 044I
When Y is determined in WS1131A, S1131B, step 044 IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ), While being controlled to the non-specific state, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed. Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103) returns N in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B.
In this case, the process does not shift to steps 044IWS1129A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

In the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forcible stoppage), the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display Could not be realized. Therefore, this feature part 044
In order to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine shown below in (Means B1) to (Means B6) is also provided to the IW. It has been disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing variable display of symbols (design) in parallel, and display of variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, CPU
103) and a special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result. Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which can be controlled to the state (state).
可 変 S128), and the variable display execution unit performs the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is performed or the variable display of the second identification information is performed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Steps 044IWS64A and S64B. FIG.
See FIG. 10-4. ), Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed. First control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example,
The update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed.) Second control derived and displayed based on the result (for example, a missing symbol) (for example, displaying and stopping the missing symbol (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the missing symbol). The first control and the second control are different depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, the CPU 103) proceeds to step 044
According to the determination results of IWS1128A and S1128B, step 044 IWS1129A,
Steps S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)
According to the determination results of IWS1127A and S1127B, step 044
Steps S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes step 044.
According to the determination results of IWS1130C and S1130D, step 044 IWS1129A,
Steps S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. ). According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In the means B1, a special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, step 044 in the CPU 103)
(A portion that executes the IWS 2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (
For example, there is a probability-variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling to a specific state that is easily controlled (for example, a high probability state (probable change state))
In which step 044 IWS2206 is executed), and the specific state control means includes:
When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the specific state (for example, after the big hit game based on the probability changing big hit is completed), the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured so as to be controlled based on the non-specific state (for example, the state is not controlled to be in the positive change state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of the means B1 to B3, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probability variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), which is different from the advantageous state and compared with the non-specific state (for example, low probability state). State control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically,
The CPU 103) includes a portion for executing step 044IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls the specific region (for example, the V region 044IW1) when controlled to the advantageous state.
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)).
Executes steps 044 IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
In the case where the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific region at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the open period of the V-region open / close plate 044IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. In the big hit game, the opening period of the V-region open / close plate 044IW101 is extremely short.) According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any of the means B1 to B4, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probable change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display execution means is a variable display of the first identification information and corresponds to the second specific display result. During the execution of the variable display, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in Modification 3, Game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)
Is N in step 044IWS1128A, when step N441WS1129A, S1
Execute 130A. See FIG. 10-55 (B). If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is performed, the second identification information is displayed. The control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (
Specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-54 and 10-55 (E). ).
According to such a configuration, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means B6) In any one of the means B1 to B5, the specific display result includes the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probable change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The advantage for the player is higher than the above (for example, the state is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game), the state is different from the advantageous state, and compared with the non-specific state (for example, the low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, C
PU104), the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when the specific state is controlled. During execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, the CPU 103) determines in step 044I
When Y is determined in WS1131A, S1131B, step 044 IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ), While being controlled to the non-specific state, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed. Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103) returns N in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B.
In this case, the process does not shift to steps 044IWS1129A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

In the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result (forcible stoppage), the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display Could not be realized. Therefore, this feature part 044
For the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the variable display result, the IW also has a characteristic configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means C1) to (means C6). It has been disclosed.

(Means C1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, CPU
103) and a special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result. Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which can be controlled to the state (state).
To S128), and the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example,
There is a probability change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed for the player rather than the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Is high (for example, it is controlled to be in a probable change state after the end of the big hit game), and the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and During execution of the variable display corresponding to the specific display result, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 10
3) is a step 044IW when Y in steps 044IWS1128A and S1128B.
By not shifting to S1129A and S1129B, the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed.) Deriving and displaying a special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result while the variable display of one of the information and the second identification information is being performed. Based on this, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps 044IWS1128A and S112).
When 8B is N, steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, S11
By executing 30B, a lost symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the lost symbol). According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means C2) In the means C1, a special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, step 044 in the CPU 103)
(A portion that executes the IWS 2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or the means C2, a specific state (for example, a state different from the advantageous state, which is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state))
Step 044 IWS220 in specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) controllable to a high probability state (probable change state).
6), the specific state control means controls to a specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed (for example, to control to a certain state after a big hit game based on a certain big hit). Yes), and may be configured to control to a non-specific state based on the second specific display result being derived and displayed (for example, not to control to a positive change state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed to a specific state.

(Means C4) In any one of the means C1 to C3, the state is different from the advantageous state, and is a specific state (e.g., a state that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., a low probability state)). , A specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which can be controlled to a high probability state (probable change state) (step 04).
4IWS2206), and the specific state control means controls the specific area (for example, the V area 044IW104) to be a game medium (for example, a game ball) when being controlled to the advantageous state.
Can be controlled to a specific state based on the fact that the game has passed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)
S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), a higher ratio when the first specific display result is displayed in the advantageous state than when the second specific display result is displayed in the derived state (See FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. As shown in the figure, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, V
The open period of the area opening / closing plate 044IW101 is extremely short. ).
According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means C5) In any one of the means C1 to C4, the variable display execution means may execute either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. Also, the special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS64A and S64B; see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). During the execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information based on the first identification information. Is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C
The PU 103) executes the processing at step 044IWS11 when N is obtained at step 044IWS1128A.
29A and S1130A are executed. See FIG. 10-55 (B). If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is performed, the second identification information is displayed. (For example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps 044IWS1126B to S11).
28B is not performed. See FIGS. 10-54 and 10-55 (E). ). According to such a configuration, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, the first
The control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means C6) In any of the means C1 to C5, a specific state (for example, a state different from the advantageous state, which is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state)) , A specific state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which can be controlled to a high probability state (probable change state) (step 04).
4IWS2206), and the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the specific state, and the second display During execution of the variable display corresponding to the display result, based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, In the modified example 4, the game control microcomputer 100
(Specifically, the CPU 103) determines in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B that Y
At this time, steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A are executed. FIG. 10-56, FIG.
See 0-57. ), While being controlled to the non-specific state, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)
When the answer is N in Steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B, Step 044IWS112
9A and S1129B do not proceed. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. ). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

Note that the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 044IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the present feature unit 044IW, so that a set value suggestion effect can be executed, or a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. Alternatively, right-handed notification may be configured to be executable. Also, for example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the characteristic portion 21TM can be changed is applied to the present characteristic portion 044IW, and a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of the other special symbol is being performed. In such a case, the variation display of one of the special symbols may be out of position, and the variation display may be forcibly stopped or displayed continuously with the symbol.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 015SH)
Next, a gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 015SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 015SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 015SH includes variable display execution means. The variable display execution means,
The identification information is variably displayed, and the display result is derived and displayed. Specifically, the variable display execution means performs variable display (for example, a special figure game) of a plurality of types of special identification information (for example, special symbols),
A predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result. Also, the variable display execution means can execute the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel.

Further, the gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 015SH includes a game control means. The game control means controls the progress of the game. The game control means may include the variable display execution means described above.
The game control means can control the game state to, for example, an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a specific state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state for the player, for example, a jackpot gaming state. When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the game control means controls to an advantageous state (big hit game state).

The special state is a state in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) can be given, for example, a small hitting game state. In addition to the prize ball, the game value includes, for example, generating a right to be in an advantageous state for the player, and setting a condition for easily winning a prize ball payout. The game control means includes a first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol display device 4A.
When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on B, a special state (for example, a small hit game state) is controlled.

The special state is a game state in which variable display is executed, and is a game state in which a game value is easily given by the special state. Specifically, the special state is, for example, the second KT state. The specific state is a game state in which variable display is performed, and is different from the special state.
The specific state is, for example, a first KT state.

The gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 015SH includes an effect control unit capable of executing an effect. For example, in the second KT state, the effect execution means performs an effect of a small hit RUSH (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “small hit rush”) as an effect indicating that the control is performed in the second KT state. Further, the effect execution means can execute a corresponding effect corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and can display a special display relating to a special state. The corresponding effect is, for example, an effect of variable display including a decorative design. In addition, the corresponding effect may include an effect of displaying a background image, a character image, or the like indicating that there is a possibility of winning a small hit, in addition to the decorative design. The special display is, for example, a display of a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small hit (for example, a combination of “1, 3, 5”).

In the characteristic part 015SH, the variable display that does not correspond to the special display result (small hit symbol) is more compatible than the variable display corresponding to the special display result (the variable display including the decorative pattern).
Is executed at a low rate. The variable display that does not correspond to the special display result is, for example, a variable display corresponding to the result of derivation of a loss (a loss change), that is, a variable display in which a loss symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined change time elapses. Further, the variable display corresponding to the special display result is, specifically, a variable display (small hit variation) in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined variation time elapses.

In the characteristic portion 015SH, in the variable display (outlier fluctuation) not corresponding to the special display result, the corresponding effect (the effect of the variable display including the decorative pattern) is not executed. However, a corresponding effect may be executed in the out-of-place fluctuation. Also, in the variable display (small hit variation) corresponding to the special display result, a corresponding effect is executed. However, the corresponding effect may not be executed in the small hit change.

Further, the effect executing means according to the characteristic portion 015SH can variably display the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the identification information. Specifically, the effect execution means variably displays the decoration identification information (decorative design) in a predetermined (normal) display mode in the corresponding effect. The effect executing means is configured to variably display reduced decoration identification information different from the variable display of decoration identification information in response to the variable display of identification information, regardless of whether the state is controlled to a special state (small hitting game state). Is executable. The reduced decoration identification information is an effect of a symbol displayed in a display mode in which the display area is narrower than the decoration identification information, and specifically, a system small symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “small symbol”).
It is.

Further, the effect execution means according to the characteristic portion 015SH can execute a specific effect different from the corresponding effect in the variable display (outlier fluctuation) not corresponding to the special display result (small hit symbol).
The specific effect may be any effect, for example, as long as it is difficult for the player to recognize that the display is variable. For example, the specific effect is an effect indicating that there is a possibility of winning a small hit in a subsequent variable display, and specifically, a predetermined character image such as “May come?” Or “Hello?” It may be an effect of outputting sound. More specifically, the specific effect is, for example, a cut-in effect. In the cut-in effect, the predetermined character image may be displayed. The cut-in effect is, for example, an effect in which a character image is displayed so as to be interrupted by an image that has been displayed.

In addition, the specific effect may be a setting value suggesting effect indicating a setting value. Also, the specific effect is not limited to the cut-in effect and the setting value suggestive effect, but is an effect of causing a specific character to appear, an effect of outputting a specific BGM, an effect of displaying a background image different from the corresponding effect, and the like. Is also good. Further, the effect executing means may execute an effect that is the same as or similar to the specific effect in the variable display (small hit variation) corresponding to the special display result.

In addition, the effect execution means according to the characteristic portion 015SH is configured to perform a variable display (
The variable display of the decoration identification information is not displayed in response to the start of the out-of-position change. The effect execution means may execute the variable display of the reduced decoration identification information (small pattern) regardless of the display or non-display of the variable display of the decoration identification information, or may hide the variable display of the decoration identification information. In this case, variable display of reduced decoration identification information (small symbols) may be executed. The effect execution means may execute the specific effect regardless of the display or non-display of the variable display of the decoration identification information, or execute the specific effect when the variable display of the decoration identification information is hidden. May be.

Further, the gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 015SH includes a holding storage unit. The suspension storage means stores information relating to the variable display as suspension storage information. The reserved storage information includes first reserved storage information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and second reserved storage information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, the gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 015SH includes a prefetch determination unit. The look-ahead determination means determines whether or not the variable display that has not been started yet is controlled to be in an advantageous state (big hit game state). The effect execution means, based on the fact that predetermined holding storage information (for example, holding storage information to be in an advantageous state) is included in the holding storage means in the variable display to be lost,
It is possible to execute a continuous effect over a plurality of variable displays. The effect execution means enables a continuous effect to be executed in any game state.

In addition, the pre-reading determination means determines whether or not the variable display that has not been started yet is controlled to the special state (small hitting game state). In the variable display (outlier fluctuation) that does not correspond to the special display result, the effect execution means determines the specific effect (prefetch identification) based on the fact that the hold storage information includes the hold storage information (small hit hold) that is in a special state. Direction) is executable. The look-ahead specific effect is an effect that can be executed over a plurality of variable displays. The look-ahead specific production is
For example, it is executed in the second KT state.

Also, for example, by preparing a prefetching specific effect (for example, a prefetching specific effect 1 and a prefetching specific effect 2) having different contents as the prefetching specific effect, is it possible to store the hold storage information that causes a small hit? It is possible to execute a specific effect of the content depending on whether or not. To be more specific, for example, the number of the pending storage information (the number of the pending storage) is “3”, and the result of the pre-reading determination for the pending storage information is “out of place, out of place,
"Small hit". In this case, the effect execution means may perform, for example, "special look-ahead effect 1, specific effect 2, a small-hit suggestion effect," as a pre-reading specific effect of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage information. For example, the prefetching specific effect 2 may be an effect having a higher degree of expectation for the small hit game than the prefetching specific effect 1. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be gradually increased. Further, the look-ahead specific effect 1 and the look-ahead specific effect 2 may be an effect (fixed effect) indicating that a small hit game is performed thereafter.

In addition, when a plurality of pieces of hold storage information are stored, there is a case where only the hold storage information of “outside” is stored (a case where the small hit hold is not stored). More specifically, for example, it is assumed that the number of reserved storages is “2”, and the result of the pre-reading determination for these pieces of reserved storage information is “missing, missing” in the variable display order of the special symbols. In this case, the effect execution means cannot perform an effect (fixed effect) indicating that the small hit game is performed thereafter since the small hit holding is not stored, and therefore, for example, there is a possibility that the small hit is performed. An effect indicating that there is (for example, display of a predetermined character image such as “Hello?”) May be performed.

Further, the effect execution means may be configured not to perform the prefetching specific effect, for example, when the first hold memory is stored, such as after the first hit, or when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. Good. To supplement this, for example, a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (
When a big hit in a normal state (a so-called first hit) occurs and the control in the second KT state is started after the big hit game, the first hold storage may be stored. In this case, the change display of the first special symbol by the first hold storage and the change display of the second special symbol by winning in the second starting winning opening (variable winning ball device 6B) by being controlled in the second KT state. Are performed simultaneously (simultaneous fluctuation).

In the second KT state, the image display device 5 mainly performs an effect of a decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, but if such simultaneous variation is performed, a large hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. Occurs, even if the second special symbol has won the small hit, the change display of the small hit may be interrupted and the big hit of the first special symbol may be executed. In such a case, if the small hit prefetching specific effect is performed, there is a possibility that the effect content indicating the small hit game by the prefetch and the game content to be executed (big hit game) may be inconsistent. For this reason, in the characteristic portion 015SH, the prefetching specific effect is not performed when the first hold storage is stored or when the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed after the transition to the second KT state. I have to do that. In addition, when the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit by the first special symbol is performed after the transition to the second KT state, for example, a general effect performed during the small hit rush (an effect indicating the small hit change, or a loss of performance) An effect different from (specific effect performed by fluctuation) may be performed. Different productions here include, for example, productions that suggest that the small hit rush ends,
The effect suggests that there is a possibility that the game state may shift to a disadvantageous state compared to the small hit rush.

In addition, the characteristic portion 015SH includes a variable unit. The variable means can change between a passable state and a difficult passage state. The variable means is, for example, a special variable winning ball device 17. The variable means can be changed to a passable state in a special state.

The effect execution means can display a special display in response to the game medium passing through the variable means. The special display is, for example, a specific display (for example, an image corresponding to the number of payouts) indicating the number of payouts when the special winning opening of the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is won, or a predetermined display (for example, an image corresponding to the number of payouts).
For example, an effect image). The effect executing means displays a predetermined display similar to the special display corresponding to the control of the special state, and displays the specific display in the display area of the predetermined display in response to the game medium passing through the variable means. The special display is thereby displayed. Therefore, in the small hit game, a special display is displayed when there is a winning in the special winning opening, and a predetermined display is displayed even when there is no winning in the special winning opening. Therefore, in the small hit game, the effect can be lively regardless of the presence or absence of a prize in the special winning opening. Note that, when the special display is displayed, the timings at which the predetermined display and the specific display are displayed may be simultaneous or different.

(Example of the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value related to the characteristic part 015SH)
Next, an example of the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value related to the characteristic portion 015SH will be described. FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram of an example of the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the characteristic portion 015SH.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the small hit probability is different (the small hit probability is low) as compared with the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. . Specifically, (A) of FIG.
, (B), the small hit probability is “31493/65536” = (48%),
The small hit probability “62986/65536” shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 10-4 = (96%
), The probability is about half. In other words, the characteristic portion 015SH indicates that it is difficult to win a small hit. The small hit probability is not limited to the above probability (48%), but may be, for example, "1/3" or a lower probability than the probability shown in FIG. For example, the probability may be higher than the probability shown in FIG.

By setting the probability lower than the small hit probability shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. Increase rate) can be suppressed from rising too much. In particular, it is possible to suppress the base value from excessively increasing in the second KT state in which the small hit game is more likely to be executed than in other game states. Therefore, according to the characteristic portion 015SH, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high, and to realize a healthy game.

(Example of Variable Display Start Setting Process in Characteristic Unit 015SH)
Next, an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 in the effect control process process (see FIG. 7) will be described. FIG. 11B is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process in the characteristic unit 015SH.

In FIG. 11B, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 015SHS101). It is determined whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It is a judgment of whether or not.
When the variation display of the first special symbol is not executed (step 015SHS101: NO), that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the CPU 120 for effect control performs step 0.
Move to 15SHS104.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (step 015SHS101: YE
S), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display with a small hit (step 015SHS102). The determination as to whether or not the current variation display is a variation display with a small hit is made, for example, by determining whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. Is determined.

If the current fluctuation display is not a fluctuation display that causes a small hit (step 015SHS102:
NO), that is, if the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display that results in a loss or a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 015SHS104. On the other hand, when the present fluctuation display is a fluctuation display in which a small hit is made (step 015SHS102: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach out-of-reach symbol as a stop symbol of the decoration symbol (step 015SHS103), and step 015SHS109. Move to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, a small ball that can hardly be expected to win a game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game is played. Hit A will be executed. Therefore, when the first special symbol change display is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach loss symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed to make it appear as a loss. Thereby, in the case of a small hit, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

In step 015SHS104, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a second KT state flag indicating that the state is the second KT state (during small hit rush) is set (step 015SHS104). When the second KT state flag is not set (
Step 015SHS104: NO), that is, in the first KT state or the normal state,
The production control CPU 120 proceeds to step 015SHS108. If the second KT state flag is set (step 015SHS104: YES), the effect control CPU
120 determines whether or not the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display that is out of order (step 0).
15SHS105). If the current fluctuation display is not a fluctuation display that is out of order (step 0
15SHS105: NO), that is, if the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display with a big hit or a small display with a second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 015SHS108.

When the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display that is out of order (step 015 SHS105: Y
ES), the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific effect setting process (step 015SH).
S106). In the specific effect setting process, a lottery process using random numbers is performed using a specific effect setting table (see FIG. 11-3) for determining the type of the specific effect, and the type of the specific effect is determined.

Here, in the characteristic portion 015SH, the winning probability per small hit is reduced to about 48% (see FIG. 11A), so that the half of the role of the variable display of the second special symbol in the second KT state is out of order. The display is changed. Assuming that in the variation display of the loss in the second KT state, similarly to the variation display of the small hit and the variation display of the loss in the normal state, it is assumed that a positive notification of the loss is provided by using the decorative design. Since it is emphasized that the variable display is not a winning display, there is a possibility that the interest in the second KT state in which it is possible to expect to obtain a payout may be reduced by the small hit. In view of this, the characteristic portion 015SH performs a specific effect in the display of the change in the out-of-focus state in the second KT state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the small symbol according to the fluctuation display result (step 015SHS107), and proceeds to step 015SHS109. Step 0
In 15SHS107, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, a stop symbol of the small symbol according to the display result designation command. Further, in step 015SHS108, effect control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (and the small symbol) according to the result of the variable display (step 015SHS108). In step 015SHS108, effect control C
The PU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (and small symbols) according to the display result designation command. When performing the specific effect, the process of step 015SHS108 (determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol) may be performed without performing the process of step 015SHS107 (determination of the symbol with the stop symbol). However, in this case, the specific effect may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative symbol so that the player cannot see the decorative symbol.

Next, if the effect control CPU 120 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used or the execution of the specific effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the process corresponding to these effects is performed. Select a table (step 015 SHS10
9). Next, effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of process data 1 in the process table selected in step 015SHS109 as the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 015SHS110). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L and 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 015SHS111). Specifically, the control of the effect device includes, for example, outputting a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP or turning on various lamps in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. A control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to perform the light / light-out control, and an audio control board 13 is output in order to perform audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is to output a control signal (sound number data).

If it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed, step 015SHS111 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table including the specific effect selected in step 015SHS106, so that the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The specific effect is executed (during the change of the loss).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decoration symbol variation time timer and starts the decoration symbol variation time timer (step 015SHS112). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect display process during variable display (step S172) (step 015SHS113), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(About an example of the specific effect setting table)
Next, an example of the specific effect setting table will be described. FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram of an example of the specific effect setting table. In FIG. 11C, the specific effect setting table indicates a ratio at which each specific effect is selected. The specific effect is an effect selected in the change display of the loss in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 11-3, the specific effect includes a specific effect A,
There is a specific effect B. The specific effects A and B are effects in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the change display of the loss, and for example, both are cut-in effects.

Specifically, the specific effects A and B include display contents indicating that there is a possibility of winning a small hit after the next fluctuation display. The specific effect setting table indicates that the specific effect A is selected at a rate of 60% and the specific effect B is selected at a rate of 40%. FIG. 11-9
In addition, by performing the prefetch determination described later with reference to FIGS. 11 to 10, if there is a hold memory (small hit hold) determined to be a small hit, the prefetch determination is performed before the fluctuation display corresponding to the small hit hold. Specific display B rather than specific display A
May be easily selected. Further, when the small hit holding is not stored, the specific effect A may be more easily selected than the specific effect B in the variable display corresponding to the loss holding. Accordingly, the specific effect B can be set as an effect having a higher degree of expectation for the small hit than the specific effect A.

In the specific effect setting table, the type of the specific effect has been described as two types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be three or more types. Further, in the specific effect setting table, an effect in which the specific effect is not performed (no specific effect) may be taken, that is, an effect of positively informing the user of a loss using a decorative design in a loss change. May be taken. However, in this case, if the effect that does not perform the specific effect is frequently performed in the outlier fluctuation, there is a risk of causing a decrease in interest, so the ratio of performing the specific effect is higher than the ratio of selecting the effect that does not perform the specific effect. May be increased.

(Example of transition of effect screen in feature section 015SH)
Next, an example of transition of the effect screen in the characteristic portion 015SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-4 to 11-8. In FIGS. 11-4 to 11-8, four consecutive fluctuation displays after the execution of the 10R probability change big hit (for example, a small hit (with a prize) → a loss → a loss → a small hit (no prize)). The transition of the effect screen including "" will be described. FIG. 11-4 to FIG.
It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of transition of the effect screen in the characteristic part 015SH.

(A) of FIG. 11-4 shows a screen in which the variation display of the first special symbol has been completed and the decorative symbol indicating the 10R probability big hit has been stopped and displayed. After the 10R certain-variable big hit is executed by the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the gaming state is controlled by the second KT state. When the variable display by the first special symbol is performed, the decorative symbol 0 is displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol.
15SH10 and the first small symbol 015SH11 are variably displayed.

The first small symbol 015SH11 is displayed smaller (small symbol display) than the decorative symbol 015SH10. Further, when the variable display by the second special symbol is performed, as shown in (E), the decorative symbol 015SH10 and the second small symbol 015SH correspond to the variable display of the second special symbol.
12 is variably displayed. The second small symbol 015SH12 is displayed smaller (small symbol display) than the decorative symbol 015SH10. In the present embodiment, the second small symbol 015SH12 is described as non-display for convenience of explanation on the screen in the non-KT state in which the variable display is mainly performed by the first special symbol. However, even in the screen in the non-KT state, the second small symbol 015SH12
May be displayed.

Here, the decorative design 015SH10 and the small design (the first small design 015SH11 and the second design
The details of the variable display and the stop display of the small symbol 015SH12) will be described. Decorative pattern 015
Each of the SH10 and the small symbols starts the fluctuation display by receiving the fluctuation pattern command for specifying the fluctuation pattern and the start of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the decorative symbol 015SH10 and the small symbol stop changing display upon receiving the symbol fixing designation command.

The decorative symbol 015SH10 is in a temporary stop state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are slightly changed before receiving the symbol confirmation designating command, and is stopped when the symbol designating designation command is received. On the other hand, the small symbol does not enter the temporary stop state before receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, but enters the stopped state when the symbol confirmation designation command is received. In addition, decorative design 015SH10
In some cases, a reach effect in a reach mode may be performed. On the other hand, the reach effect is not performed in the small design. For this reason, for the small symbols, uniform fluctuation display is performed from the reception of the fluctuation pattern command to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command.

In (A), when a predetermined symbol determination time elapses, the screen transitions to (B). (B)
Shows a screen of the fanfare period when the big hit game is started. In (B), when the fanfare period has elapsed, a round game is started. (C) shows a screen in the tenth round game. On the screen shown in (C), a total prize ball count image 015SH13 indicating the total prize ball count of payouts paid out in the big hit game is displayed. 10
When the round game of the round ends, the screen transits to the screen of (D). (D) shows the ending screen of the big hit, for example, a screen showing a transition to the small hit rush (second KT state). When the ending period of the big hit game has elapsed, the screen transitions to (E).

(E) shows an effect screen in the case of a small hit in the first variable display after the shift to the small hit rush. Here, in the small hit rush, the variable display mainly by the second special symbol is performed. When the variable display by the second special symbol is performed, the decorative symbol 015SH10 and the second small symbol 015SH12 are variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display by the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the first small symbol 015SH11 is not displayed on the screen in the KT state in which the variable display is mainly performed by the second special symbol. However,
The first small symbol 015SH11 may be displayed on the screen in the KT state. In (E), when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the screen transitions to (F). (F) is a decorative pattern 01
5SH10 and the second small symbol 015SH12 indicate a small hit (for example, “1, 3, 5”
) Shows the screen stopped and displayed. The screen of (E) can emphasize that the change display is a small hit, and the screen of (F) can emphasize that the small hit game is started. In (F), when the symbol determination time has elapsed, the screen transits to the screen (G) in FIG. 11-5.

(G) to (L) of FIG. 11-5 show screens during the small hit game. The transition of the screens (G) to (L) describes an effect in which the effect image 015SH21 (or the special display 015SH22) is continuously displayed three times (for example, an effect in which a spark scatters three times during a small hit game). . The period in which the small hit game is executed is a small hit opening pre-processing period (for example, 1 second) and a special winning opening opening period (1.8 seconds: small hit C, or 0.8 seconds: small hit B) ) And a small hit ending period (3 seconds).

(G) shows an effect screen in which an effect image 015SH21a which is a predetermined display is displayed, and suggests that a prize can be expected in a special winning opening. Then, when there is a winning in the special winning opening, the screen transits to the screen of (H). (H) shows the payout number corresponding image (+10) as a specific display indicating that a special winning opening has been won in the display area of the effect image 015SH21a.
Shows an effect screen including a special display 015SH22a on which an image (showing an image) is displayed. Also, (H
), The total prize ball count image 015SH13 indicates that the number indicated by the special display 015SH22a has been added.

Then, in (H), when the display period for displaying the special display 015SH22a has elapsed, the screen changes to (I). The screens shown in (I) and (J) described below and (K)
, (L) are compared with the screens shown in (G) and (H).
The display positions of H21 and special display 015SH22 are different. Specifically, (I)
Shows a screen on which the effect image 015SH21b which is a predetermined display is displayed. And
When there is a winning in the special winning opening, as shown in the screen of (J), the effect image 015SH2
Special display 015S in which the number-of-payouts image (image indicating +10) is displayed in the display area 1b
H22b is displayed. In addition, the total prize ball number image 015SH13 is a special display 015SH22.
Indicates that the number indicated by b has been added.

Then, in (J), when the display period for displaying the special display 015SH22b elapses, the screen changes to (K). (K) is an effect image 015SH21c which is a predetermined display.
Shows the screen on which is displayed. Then, when there is a winning in the special winning opening, as shown in the screen (L), the payout number corresponding image (the image indicating +10) indicating that there is a winning in the special winning opening is displayed in the display area of the effect image 015SH21c. ) Is displayed on the special display 015SH22c. The total prize ball count image 015SH13 indicates that the number indicated by the special display 015SH22c has been added. In the example of the screens shown in (G) to (L), the effect image 015SH21 and the special display 015SH22, which are the predetermined displays, are displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative pattern 015SH10, but are displayed in other areas. It may be displayed. However, the effect image 015SH21 and the special display 015SH22a are displayed in an area where visibility of a predetermined image related to the progress of the game (for example, an image indicating “right-handed” or an image indicating the second small symbol 015SH12) is obstructed. You may not make it do.

As described above, the transition of the screens (G) to (L) is an effect in which the player views the effect image 015SH21 and the special display 015SH22 almost simultaneously. For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 11-5, the case where the effect image 015SH21 is displayed first, and then the special display 015SH22 is displayed, but these may be displayed at the same timing. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.
If there is no winning in the special winning opening during the display period of the 15SH21 (for example, the effect image 015SH21a), the effect image 015SH21a is deleted after the lapse of the display period.
The effect image 015SH21b is displayed.

Further, in the above description, since the opening period of the special winning opening is a maximum of 1.8 seconds (small hit C), for example, a winning of about three balls can be expected, so that the effect image 015SH21 (or the special display 015SH22) is displayed. The effect was displayed three times in succession (for example, an effect in which sparks scattered three times). However, when the opening period of the special winning opening is another period (0.8 seconds: small hit B), the number of effect images 015SH21 (or the special display 015SH22) corresponding to the number of winnings expected in the period is displayed. May be. In addition, each effect image 015SH2
In the case where two prizes are won in the special winning opening (continuous prize) in the period corresponding to 1, the effect image 015SH21 and the special display 015SH22 may be displayed separately. A payout-number-corresponding image indicating “+20”, which is payout for a ball, may be displayed.

The screen transition of (G) to (L) is a period including any of the small hit opening pre-processing period, the special winning opening opening period (small hit opening period), and the small hit ending period. What should be done is. For example, the screen transition of (G) to (L) may be performed in the small hit ending period. When the screen transition of (G) to (L) is performed after the start of the small hit ending period, the effect image 015SH21 and the special display 015SH22 can be displayed at the same timing. Specifically, in this case, when the small hit ending is started, in the effect in which the spark scatters three times in accordance with the number of balls (for example, two balls) entering the special winning opening during the small hit opening period, once, Only the effect image 015SH21 is displayed, and the special display 0 times
It may be an effect in which 15SH22 is displayed. Further, for example, the screen shown in (G) may be displayed from the small hit opening pre-processing period. The display of the effect image 015SH21 and the special display 015SH22 may be performed over the next variable display.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-5, the timing for adding the value indicated by the total prize ball number image 015SH13 is the same as the timing for displaying the special display 015SH22, but is not limited thereto.
The display may be after the special display 015SH22 is displayed (after the player has paid attention to the special display 015SH22a). In this case, the number indicated by the special display 015SH22 is the total prize ball number image 015.
An effect effect taken in by SH13 may be performed. Thus, the special display 015SH22
By performing the effect of adding the value indicated by the total prize ball number image 015SH13 at different timings, the special display 015SH22 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the special winning opening has been won, It can be made easier for the player to recognize that the number of prize balls shown in the special display 015SH22 has been increased to the total prize ball number image 015SH13.

The effect indicating the addition of the number of prize balls shown in the total prize ball number image 015SH13 may be performed after the closing of the special winning opening, and specifically, may be performed during the small hit ending period, It may be performed from the winning ending period to the next variable display, or may be performed in the next variable display.

When the small hit game ends, for example, the decorative symbol 015SH10 is moved in a predetermined direction (for example, downward).
Then, the screen transitions to the screen (M) in FIG. 11-6. (M) shows an effect screen in the variable display in the case of a loss. In the fluctuation display that is out, the specific effect 015SH
31a (cut-in effect) is performed. The specific effect 015SH31a is an effect that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the change display is a change in the loss. Specifically, specific production 015SH
An effect 31a indicates that there is a possibility of winning a small hit in the subsequent fluctuation display. On the screen shown in (M), the decorative pattern 015SH10 is not displayed. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the second special symbol is being changed and displayed. On the other hand, on the screen shown in (M), the second small symbol 015SH12 is displayed. For this reason, the player can grasp from the second small symbol 015SH12 that the second special symbol is being changed and displayed. In the screen shown in (M), the screen changes to the screen shown in (N) when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses.

(N) shows a screen in which the second small symbol 015SH12 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a loss. On the screen shown in (N), it is difficult to recognize that the specific effect 015SH31a is continuously performed, and the symbol fluctuation is stopped. In (N), when the symbol determination time has elapsed, the screen transits to the screen of (O).

(O) shows an effect screen showing a variable display that becomes a loss. In the outlier fluctuation display shown in (O), a specific effect 015SH31b (cut-in effect) is performed. Specific production 015SH
31b is an effect that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the variation display is a loss display, similarly to the specific effect 015SH31a. The specific effect 015SH31b is a specific effect 015SH31
For example, the image shown in the balloon is different from a. In addition, specific production 015SH31a
The specific effect 015SH31b is selected by a determination based on a random number. For this reason,
In the case where the variable display that results in a loss is continuous, for example, the specific effect 015SH31a may be continuously executed, or the specific effect 015SH31b may be continuously executed. (
In O), when the fluctuation time elapses, the screen changes to the screen in (P).

(P) shows a screen in which the second small symbol 015SH12 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a loss. On the screen shown in (P), it is difficult to recognize that the specific effect 015SH31b is continuously performed, and the symbol fluctuation is stopped. In (P), when the symbol determination time has elapsed, the screen transits to the screen of (Q).

(Q) shows the screen during the variable display in the case of the small hit, and specifically shows the screen in which the variable display is performed by the decorative symbol 015SH10 and the second small symbol 015SH12. At the start of the variable display in the case of a small hit, for example, the decorative design 015SH10 fades in from a predetermined direction (for example, from above), and starts the variable display. In (Q), an effect similar to the specific effect 015SH31b or an effect that can increase the player's expectation than the specific effect 015SH31b (for example, a cut-in effect having a larger display area than the specific effect 015SH31b). May go.

In (Q), when the fluctuation time elapses, the screen transitions to (R). (R) is a symbol in which the decorative symbol 015SH10 and the second small symbol 015SH12 indicate a small hit (for example, “1, 3
, 5 ") shows the screen stopped and displayed. As shown in (M) to (R), the specific effect 015S is displayed in two out-of-consecutive fluctuation displays out of a plurality of consecutive (three) fluctuation displays.
By performing H31 and performing an effect using the decorative design 015SH10 in the variable display that becomes a small hit, it is possible to make the continuous variable display (three times) appear as a single variable display that becomes a small hit. . In (R), when the symbol determination time has elapsed, the screen transits to the screen (S) in FIG. 11-7.

(S) to (X) of FIG. 11-7 show screens when there is no winning in the special winning opening during the small hit game. Note that (S) to (X) in FIG. 11-7 are different from (G) to (L) in FIG. 11-5 mainly in that the special display 015SH22 is not displayed (effect image 015SH).
21 is continued). (S) and (T) show the effect image 015SH
21a is displayed, indicating an effect screen indicating that a prize can be expected in the special winning opening. Then, the screens shown in (S) and (T) are continuously displayed until a predetermined display period has elapsed without a winning in the special winning opening.

Then, when a predetermined display period has elapsed, the screen changes to a screen shown in (U). (U) and (
V) shows an effect screen on which the effect image 015SH21b is displayed, and suggests that a prize can be expected in the special winning opening. Then, the screens shown in (U) and (V) are continuously displayed until a predetermined display period elapses without a winning in the special winning opening.

Then, when a predetermined display period has elapsed, the screen changes to a screen shown in (W). (W) and (
X) shows an effect screen on which the effect image 015SH21c is displayed, and suggests that a prize can be expected in the special winning opening. Then, the screens shown in (W) and (X) are continuously displayed until a predetermined display period elapses without a winning in the special winning opening.

The transition between the screens (S) to (X) is an effect in which the effect image 015SH21 is continuously displayed three times (for example, an effect in which sparks scatter three times). For this reason, even when there is no prize in the special winning opening during the small hit game, the effect during the small hit game can be lively, and the effect can be excited. Specifically, even if there is no winning in the special winning opening, the effect image 015S
Since the production by H21 is performed, it is possible to perform a production similar to that in the case where a prize is won. Therefore, it is possible not to emphasize that there is no prize during the small hit game, and it is possible to excite the effect.

Then, when the small hitting game is completed, for example, the screen is changed to a small hit change display screen shown in (Y) and (Z) of FIG. 11-8. Thus, in the small hit rush (second KT state), the effect using the decorative design 015SH10 is performed in the small hit change, and the specific effect 015SH31 is performed in the small change. Further, in the small hit rush, for example, when the small hit game is executed 30 times, an effect screen indicating the effect is displayed as shown in (A1). Further, for example, when the small hitting game is executed 100 times, an effect screen indicating that fact is displayed as shown in (A2).

(About the transition of the effect screen of the specific look-ahead effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-9, a description will be given of a transition of an effect screen when a prefetch specific effect is performed by using the result of the prefetch determination. FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of transition of the effect screen of the prefetching specific effect. In FIGS. 11A to 11F, transition of the effect screen of three consecutive variable displays (losing → losing → small hit) will be described. Also, 3
It is assumed that the determination result of the pre-reading determination has been obtained for each hold storage at the time when at least the first variation display among the consecutive variation displays is started.

In FIG. 11-9, (A) shows an effect screen during variable display that is a loss during a small hit rush. In the out-of-order fluctuation display shown in (A), a specific effect 015SH31a (cut-in effect) is performed. In (A), when the fluctuation time elapses, the screen transitions to (B). (B) shows a screen in which the second small symbol 015SH12 is stopped and displayed with a symbol (for example, a combination of “1, 3, 3”) indicating a loss. On the screen shown in (B), the specific effect 015SH31
a is continuously performed, and it is made difficult to recognize that the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The symbol combination of “1,3,3” is a symbol combination close to the symbol combination of “1,3,5” indicating a small hit, and there is a possibility of winning a small hit in the subsequent variable display. It is possible to suggest that there is. In (B), when the symbol determination time has elapsed, the screen is changed to the screen of (C).

(C) shows an effect screen showing a variable display that becomes a loss. In the variation display that is an outlier shown in (C), a specific effect 015SH31c (cut-in effect) is performed. Specific production 015
SH31c is an image indicating that a small hit is won (small hit determination) in the subsequent variable display. Therefore, the specific effect 015SH31c is the specific effect 015SH31 of (B).
It can be said that the effect is higher in the degree of expectation for small hits than in b. In (C), when the fluctuation time elapses, the screen transitions to (D). (D) shows a screen in which the second small symbol 015SH12 is stopped and displayed with a symbol (a combination of “1, 3, 4”) indicating a loss. On the screen shown in (D),
The specific effect 015SH31c is continuously performed, and it is made difficult to recognize that the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The combination of the symbols “1,3,4” is “1,3,3” shown in (B).
It is a combination of symbols that is closer to the combination of symbols "1,3,5" indicating a small hit than the combination of symbols "3". For example, compared to (B), a small hit is won in the subsequent variable display. It is possible to suggest that it is likely to do so. In (D), when the symbol confirmation time elapses,
The screen is transited to (E).

(E) shows a screen during variable display when a small hit occurs. In (E), the second small symbol 015SH12 is displayed in a variable manner and stopped according to the second special symbol. Note that (E
), An effect similar to the specific effect 015SH31c, or an effect that can enhance the player's expectation than the specific effect 015SH31c (for example, a cut-in effect having a larger display area than the specific effect 015SH31c) may be performed. . In (E), when the fluctuation time elapses, the screen transitions to (F). (F) shows a screen in which the second small symbol 015SH12 is stopped and displayed in a symbol ("1, 3, 5") indicating a small hit. Then, when the symbol determination time has elapsed, the small hit game is executed. Note that the combination of the symbols “1,3,3” shown in (B), the combination of the symbols “1,3,4” shown in (D), and the combination of symbols “1,3” shown in (F). , 5 "can be a series of continuous effects with small symbols. It should be noted that a series of continuous effects using small symbols may be able to take a so-called gaseous effect. The gassing effect referred to here is an effect in which the continuity of the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed is interrupted (an effect that does not eventually result in a small hit). For example, the combination of symbols "1, 3, 4" is stopped and displayed. After that, the display is stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols having no relation to the combination of symbols indicating the small hit (for example, a combination of symbols of “3, 9, 5”). A series of continuous effects with small symbols may be performed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10%) when the small hit holding is stored. However, from the viewpoint of not paying attention to the small symbols, a series of continuous effects using the small symbols may not be performed.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, by using the determination result of the pre-reading determination, even if the outlier fluctuation is continuous, the start of the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold storage of the small hit can be prevented while preventing the appearance of the outlier fluctuation. As approaching, it is possible to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation for the small hit game. Therefore, even if there is a player who pays attention to the small symbol, the player can gradually increase the sense of expectation for the small hit game, and can enhance the interest of the out-of-change during the small hit rush. it can.

(About an example of the look-ahead specific effect setting table)
Next, an example of the look-ahead specific effect setting table will be described. FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the prefetching specific effect setting table. The look-ahead specific effect setting table shown in FIG. 11-10 stores a hold memory (small hit hold) determined to be a small hit by the look-ahead determination and a hold memory (miss hold) determined to be a miss. In this case, it indicates the execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display corresponding to the loss holding performed earlier than the variable display corresponding to the small hit holding.

In the look-ahead specific effect setting table, “presence or absence of small hit” indicates the presence or absence of a hold memory (small hit hold) determined to be a small hit by the pre-read determination. The “number of missed holds until small hit hold” is the number of held missed holds corresponding to the change display of the miss (short change) executed before the change display (small hit change) corresponding to the small hit hold. Show. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead specific effect is performed in the variable display corresponding to the second hold storage stored during the small hit rush.

"1" shown in "Number of missed hold until small hit hold" is "miss, small hit" in the order of variable display.
Indicates that the second hold information determined to be pre-read is stored, and more specifically,
In the case where the number of second reserved storages is “2”, the case where it is determined that the first second reserved storage is out of order and that the second second reserved storage is a small hit is prefetched. Show. In addition, “2” shown in the “number of off-holds until the small hit holding” is “off, off,
This shows a case where the second hold information determined to be the prefetch is “small hit” is stored. More specifically, when the second hold storage number is “3”, the first and second hold information are stored. This shows a case where the prefetch determination is made that the second hold storage is a miss and the prefetch determination is made that the third second hold storage is a small hit. Further, “3” shown in “number of missed hold until small hit hold” indicates a case where the second hold information determined to be prefetched as “miss, miss, miss, small hit” in the variable display order is stored. More specifically, in the case where the number of second reserved storages is 4, it is determined that the first to third second reserved storages are missed, and the fourth second reserved storage is a small hit. This shows a case where it is determined that there is a pre-reading.

Note that when the “number of off-holds until the small hit hold” is “0”, that is, when the second hold storage number is “1” and the second hold storage is determined to be a small hit, Is not subject to the look-ahead specific effect setting (not described in the look-ahead specific effect setting table) because no specific effect is performed because the change display of the loss is not performed. However, in this case, in one variation display that becomes a small hit, the symbol indicating the small hit may be stopped and displayed after performing the specific effect.

The "specific effect performed in each of the hold-off change display" indicates a scenario of a specific effect performed in each change display corresponding to the hold-off until the small hit hold. If there is no "number of missed holds until small hit holding", that is, if it is not determined that a small hit will be made in the subsequent fluctuation display, if a plurality of consecutive missed holds are stored However, a specific effect is determined for each variable display. In this case, any one of the specific effects A, B, and C is selected. The specific effects A, B, and C are effects that suggest that there is a possibility of a small hit in the subsequent fluctuation display.

In addition, when the “number of missed holds until the small hit holding” is 1, that is, when a change display that becomes a small hit is executed after one miss change is executed, “execute with the change display of each missed hold” is executed. The specific effect to be performed "is a specific effect to be performed in one outgoing change. In this case, any one of the specific effects A to D is selected.

The degree of expectation of each specific effect with respect to the small hit is “specific effect D> specific effect C> specific effect B> specific effect A” in descending order of the degree of expectation. More specifically, for example, a specific effect B
Is less likely to be selected when the small hit hold is not stored than the specific effect A, and is more likely to be selected when the small hit hold is stored. It is a high level production. In addition, the specific effect C is less likely to be selected when the small hit hold is not stored and is more likely to be selected when the small hit hold is stored than the specific effect B, so that the specific effect C is smaller than the specific effect B. It is a production with high expectation for hit. Also, in the subsequent variable display, the specific effect D is not selected when the small hit holding is not stored, but is selected when the small hit holding is stored. This is an effect that shows what you do (determination of small hits).

Further, “specific effects to be executed in the variation display of each outgoing hold” indicates a scenario of a specific effect to be continuously executed. Specifically, for example, the “number of off-holds until the small hit holding” is “2”.
In the case of, that is, when the variation display that is a small hit is executed after the two miss variations are executed, the “specific effect performed with the variation display of each miss hold” is executed in each of the two miss variations. The following shows the scenario of a specific production. For example, "A → B" shown in "Specific effects executed in the variation display of each off-hold" indicates that the specific effect A is executed at the first variation and the specific effect B is executed at the second variation. (Scenario).

Further, in the look-ahead specific effect setting table, of the specific effects performed in the two outliers, from the specific effect performed in the first outlier to the specific effect performed in the second outlier. That is, the degree of expectation of the effect is not reduced, that is, the so-called effect of the effect is not reduced. Specifically, for example, after the specific effect C (high expectation) is performed at the first variation of the outgoing change, the specific effect A (
Low expectations). Note that in the second variation, the specific effect (specific effect B) indicated by the scenario determined in the first variation is executed without making a determination regarding the setting of the prefetching specific effect.

Similarly, when the “number of missed hold until small hit holding” is “3”, that is, when a change display that becomes a small hit is executed after three miss changes are executed, “variation of each miss hold” is performed. The “executed specific effect in display” indicates a scenario of a specific effect to be executed in each of three out-of-place fluctuations. For example, “A → B → C” shown in “Specific Effects Performed in Variation Display of Each Loss Hold” indicates that a specific effect A is to be performed in the first variation and a specific effect B is to be performed in the second variation. This shows that the specific effect C is executed (scenario) in the third variation.

Also, with respect to the specific effect in the three out-of-place fluctuations, the effect is prevented from falling. Specifically, for example, out of the specific effects performed in three outliers,
From the specific effect performed in the first variation to the specific effect performed in the second variation, the expected degree of the effect is not reduced, and the second variation is performed in the second variation. From the specific effect to the specific effect executed in the third variation, the expected degree of the effect does not decrease. At the start of the second or third variation, the specific effect (for example, the specific effect B or the specific effect) indicated by the scenario determined in the first variation is not performed without determining the setting of the prefetching specific effect. C) is selected and executed.

In FIG. 11-10, a case has been described in which a specific effect to be executed in a plurality of continuous outlier fluctuation displays is selected as a scenario to execute a look-ahead specific effect in which the effect is not degraded. The selection of the effect is not limited to the selection as a scenario. For example, it is also possible to execute a look-ahead specific effect by selecting a specific effect each time when each variable display is started. To clarify by giving a specific example, it is assumed that the second hold information determined to be “missing, missing, small hit” in the variable display order by the pre-reading determination is stored. In this case, of the two consecutive fluctuations, the deviation fluctuation corresponding to the deviation suspension executed later (the second deviation suspension) is changed to the previously executed deviation suspension (the first deviation suspension). What is necessary is just to select a specific effect that does not lower the degree of expectation than the specific effect performed with the corresponding out-of-place variation. More specifically, the specific effect executed in the previous outlier fluctuation is stored, and in the later outlier fluctuation, the specific effect having a lower degree of expectation than the specific effect performed in the earlier outlier fluctuation cannot be selected. What is necessary is just to make it possible, that is, to make it possible to select only a specific effect with the same degree of expectation. Even in this case, a look-ahead specific effect in which the effect does not fall can be performed.

(Modification of specific production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 11, as a modification of the specific effect, a case will be described in which a setting value suggestion effect indicating a setting value is performed in the specific effect. FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a case where a set value suggestion effect is performed in a specific effect. 11A to 11A.
In F), a description will be given of a transition of the effect screen of three consecutive variable displays (miss → miss → small hit). The screens shown in FIGS. 11A to 11F are the same as those shown in FIG.
As compared with the respective screens shown in FIGS. 7A to 7R, the difference is that a set value suggestion effect 015SH41 is performed.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the contents described in FIG.
Description is omitted.

11A to 11D, the specific effect 015SH31a includes a setting value suggestion effect 015SH41. The set value suggestion effect 015SH41 is an effect that indicates which of the set values 1 to 6 is more likely. For example, setting value suggestion effect 015S
H41 is executed by selecting one of three types of setting value suggestion effects A, B, and C in which the number of images of “☆” is different. The setting value suggestion effect 015SH41 can be executed in the variation display of the second special symbol that is lost during the small hit rush.

Specifically, the set value suggestion effect 015SH41 is the second during the small hit rush.
When the special symbol change display is started, a setting value suggestive effect determination for selecting whether or not to execute and a type of execution is performed. Therefore, depending on the determination result, the setting value suggestion effect 015SH41 may not be executed in the out-of-place change, or a different type of setting value suggestion effect 015SH41 may be executed for each change display. Specifically, at the start of the fluctuation display shown in (A) and the start of the fluctuation display shown in (C), the setting value suggestion effect determination is performed, and the effect of the type according to the determination result is executed. You.

In addition, the setting value suggestion effect determination is performed for each change display, and the setting value suggestion effect is not limited to the setting value suggestion effect according to the determination result. The set value suggestion effect may be performed uniformly. In this case, the set value suggesting effect may be performed for all the outgoing fluctuations during the small hit rush, or the set value suggesting effect may be performed for a predetermined outgoing fluctuation according to the lottery result. Also, during the small hit rush, 1-20
The setting value suggestion effect determination may be performed at the start of each section, such as a change eye, a 21st to 40th change eye, and the setting value suggestion effect according to the determination result may be uniformly performed in each section. Even in this case,
The set value suggestion effect may be performed for all outlier fluctuations in each section, or the set value suggestion effect may be performed for predetermined outlier fluctuations according to the lottery result.

The set value suggestion effect 015SH41 is a specific effect 015SH3 which is a cut-in effect.
1, but the cut-in effect is not performed, and the set value suggestion effect 015S
H41 may be performed alone. Specifically, for example, when only the setting value suggestion effect 015SH41 is performed alone, the image of “☆” indicated by the setting value suggestion effect 015SH41 is displayed large, or a character image corresponding to the setting value is displayed. , A background image corresponding to the set value may be displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 015SH10 may not be displayed. By performing such a setting value suggestion effect 015SH41, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the display is a variable display that is out of the range. In addition, the setting value suggestion effect 015SH41 may be an effect that is always displayed in the event of a change in the loss, but is not limited to this, and may be an effect that is executed for a predetermined time (for example, only for a moment) at a predetermined timing in the change in the error.

In addition, the set value suggestion effect 015SH41 is not limited to being performed in the outfall fluctuation,
It may be performed in the small hit variation, or may be performed during the small hit game. For example, the set value suggestion effect 015SH41 may be performed during any of the small hit opening pre-processing period, the special winning opening opening period, and the small hit ending period during the small hit game. Specifically, the set value suggestion effect 015SH41 is the effect image 01 during the small hit game.
It may be performed at a specific timing such as the timing of displaying 5SH21 (see FIG. 11-5) or the timing of displaying the special display 015SH22a.

(Example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table during the small hit rush)
Next, an example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table used during the small hit rush will be described. FIG. 11-12 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table used during the small hit rush. The setting value suggestion effect determination table illustrated in FIGS. 11 to 12 indicates whether or not the setting value suggestion effect is executed and the selection ratio of the type according to the setting value. For example, the higher the set value, the easier the set value suggestion effect is performed, and the lower the set value, the harder the set value suggestion effect is performed. Further, the setting value suggestion effect A indicating the type of the setting value suggestion effect has a low setting value (
The setting suggests that the possibility is high. The set value suggestion effect B is an effect indicating that the possibility that the set value is medium (middle setting) is high. The set value suggestion effect C is an effect that indicates that there is a high possibility that the set value is high (high setting).

By determining the setting value suggestion effect using such a setting value suggestion effect determination table, when the frequency at which the setting value suggestion effect is performed is low, it is suggested that the player is likely to have a low setting value. can do. Further, it is possible to suggest a set value that is highly likely to be set in the player, depending on the type of the set value suggestion effect to be executed. In the setting value suggestion effect determination table, the types of the setting value suggestion effects are not limited to three, and for example, the setting value is “5”.
It may include a type indicating that it is determined as described above, or may include a type indicating negative that the set value is “1”.

Here, as the setting value suggestion effect during the small hit rush, it is also possible to perform a small hit rush continuation suggestion effect indicating the possibility of the small hit rush continuing. In this embodiment,
The lower the set value is, the harder it is to win a big hit, so the lower the set value is, the higher the possibility that the small hit rush will be continued. The small hit rush is a state in which the number of prize balls can be increased by the small hit. Further, the small hit rush ends with the occurrence of the big hit. Therefore, during the small hit rush, the player desires not to win the big hit. In other words, during the small hit rush, it may be more advantageous for the player when the setting value is lower than when the setting value is higher. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by performing the small hit rush continuation suggestion effect as the setting value suggestive effect during the small hit rush.

In this case, for example, the frequency at which the small hit rush continuation suggestion effect is executed may be different depending on the set value. Specifically, for example, as the set value is lower, the small hit rush continuation suggestion effect may be more easily executed, and as the set value is higher, the smaller hit rush continuation suggestion effect may be less likely to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the small hit rush will be continued (the possibility of continuing) is small in accordance with the frequency at which the small hit rush continuation suggestion effect is executed (the higher the frequency).

In addition, a plurality of types of small hit rush continuation suggestion effects may be prepared, and the type of the small hit rush continuation suggestion effect to be executed may be different depending on the set value. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility that the small hit rush will be continued depending on the type of the small hit rush continuation suggestion effect to be executed.

(About screen transitions when stepping up pseudo specific effects similar to specific effects in small hit fluctuations)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13, a description will be given of a transition of a screen in a case where a pseudo specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) that is the same as or similar to the specific effect is stepped up in the small hit change. FIG. 11-13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of screen transition when the pseudo specific effect is stepped up in the small hit variation. In FIGS. 11-13 (A)-(F),
A step-up effect in a case where a pseudo specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) is developed in a stepwise manner in a single variable display for a small hit. Further, this step-up effect can be shown as an effect similar to a series of prefetching specific effects performed over three variable displays shown in FIGS. 11A to 11F.

Specifically, the step-up effects shown in (A) to (F) of FIGS.
An effect that can be executed when the second variation pattern (the variation pattern # 33 in FIG. 10-9 (I)) is selected. Further, for example, the three fluctuation displays shown in (A) to (F) of FIG. 11-9 are all 1.5-second fluctuation patterns (the fluctuation patterns # 29 and # 32 of FIG. 10-9 (I)). ) Is selected as an executable prefetching specific effect, a series of effects based on the prefetching specific effect and the 5-second variation patterns shown in FIGS. 11A to 11F are selected. The pseudo specific effect (step-up effect) executed in this case can be shown as a similar effect.

In FIG. 11-13, (A) shows the screen at the start of the variable display that results in a small hit. The screen shown in (A) shows a pseudo specific effect 015SH51a (step-up effect A) and a variation display of the second small symbol 015SH12. The screen shown in (B) similar to the screen shown in (A) is continuously displayed until a predetermined display period elapses after the pseudo specific effect 015SH51a is displayed. When the predetermined display period has elapsed, the screen shown in FIG.
The screen changes to the screen shown in ()).

The screen shown in (C) shows a pseudo specific effect 015SH51b (step-up effect B) and a variation display of the second small symbol 015SH12. The pseudo specific effect 015SH51b (step-up effect B) is an effect having a higher degree of expectation for a small hit than the pseudo specific effect 015SH51a (step-up effect A). A screen shown in (D) similar to the screen shown in (C) is continuously displayed until a predetermined display period elapses after the pseudo specific effect 015SH51b is displayed. Then, when a predetermined display period has elapsed, the screen changes from the screen shown in (D) to the screen shown in (E).

The screen shown in (E) is a decorative symbol 01 which is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed second special symbol.
5SH10 and a second small symbol 015SH12 are shown. In (E), when a predetermined display period has elapsed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (F). (F) shows a screen in which the second small symbol 015SH12 is stopped and displayed in a symbol ("1, 3, 5") indicating a small hit. Then, when the symbol determination time has elapsed, the small hit game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, by stepping up the pseudo specific effect 015SH51, when a 5-second variation pattern (the second variation pattern # 33 in FIG. 10-9 (I)) is selected, a small It is possible to gradually increase the sense of expectation for a hit game. FIG.
In FIG. 13, the case where the pseudo specific effect 015SH51 is stepped up in two steps is shown. However, there may be a case where the pseudo specific effect 015SH51 is not changed stepwise (only the first step pseudo specific effect SH51a is displayed), or 2 There may be a case where the third stage is changed after the first stage.
In this case, in the second special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 10-9 (I)), a small hit variation pattern corresponding to the number of stages of each step-up effect (effect time) is selectably stored. You may leave.

In addition, the above-described pseudo specific effect 015SH51 may be performed with a change in a loss. Specifically, for example, when a variation pattern of 5 seconds (second variation pattern # 30 in FIG. 10-9 (I)) is selected in the out-of-off variation, the process is stepped up to, for example, two stages (or three stages). The pseudo specific effect 015SH51 may be executed. In addition, in the case where a small hit variation is performed next to the loss variation in which the pseudo specific effect 015SH51 has been performed, a continuous effect in which the loss variation in which the pseudo specific effect 015SH51 is performed and the small hit variation can be performed. . That is,
In the case where the outlier fluctuation is executed before the fluctuation display corresponding to the small hit holding, the pseudo specific effect 015SH51 that steps up in a plurality of stages in the outlier fluctuation may be made executable. In order to enable the execution of the pseudo-specific effect 015SH51 in a plurality of stages in the loss variation, the number of steps of the step-up effect (effect time) is stored in the second special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 10-9 (I)). ) May be stored in a selectable manner. In addition, in the case of the outlier fluctuation in the case where the small hit holding is not stored, the pseudo specific effect 015SH51 in a plurality of stages may not be executable or may be executable.

In the above description, the case where the characteristic portion 015SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. However, the characteristic portion 015SH may be applied to a slot machine. In the slot machine, for example, a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player. When the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the player is caused to play, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ) (Hereinafter referred to as a bonus machine).

Hereinafter, a case where the characteristic unit 015SH according to the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine will be described. In the characteristic portion 015SH applied to the slot machine, the variable display execution means performs variable display of identification information (for example, symbols included in reels), and derives and displays a display result. Also, in the characteristic portion 015SH, the game control means sets the game value when the special display result (for example, the pushing sequence won by the internal lottery during the AT or the ART) is derived and displayed as the variable display result. It can be controlled to a special state in which it can be given (for example, a medal can be paid out or a re-game is possible). The pressing sequence (special display result) during AT (assist time) is, for example, a combination of symbols "bell-bell-bell". Further, the pressing sequence (special display result) during ART (assist replay time) is, for example, a combination of symbols indicating replay.

In addition, the effect execution means relating to the characteristic portion 015SH can execute a corresponding effect (a navigation effect during an AT or an ART) corresponding to the variable display, and can display a special display (a display indicating a pressing sequence) regarding a special state. It is. The navigation effect is an effect in which the operation order of the stop button is notified by the image display device during the variable display of the variable display means (the rotating reel). In the characteristic portion 015SH, the variable display that does not correspond to the special display result (variable display of the loss) is more compatible than the variable display corresponding to the special display result (the variable display from which the display indicating the pressing sequence is derived). (Navi production) is low.

In the feature part 015SH, the navigation effect is not executed in the variable display of the outlier,
In the variable display of the pressing sequence, the navigation effect may be executed. Also, the effect execution means may execute a specific effect different from the navigation effect in the variable display of the outlier. It is desirable that the specific effect is, for example, an effect that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the variable display is a variable display.

As described above, the characteristic portion 015SH is a gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of performing a game), and a game control unit ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C
PU 103), and an effect execution unit (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect, wherein the game control unit includes:
Variable display is performed, and when a special display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) can be given. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 6 (specifically, C
PU 103), and the effect executing means corresponds to an effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, decorative pattern 01 shown in FIG. 11-4 (E)).
The effect including the 5SH10) is executed (the part for executing step S171 in the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 8), and a special display relating to the special state (for example, FIG.
) Can be displayed (for example, FIG. 1 shows a combination of decorative patterns “1, 3, 5” indicating small hits).
1-2 is a part for executing the step 015SHS108 in the effect control CPU 120), and the variable display (for example, out-of-position fluctuation) that does not correspond to the special display result is (
For example, step 015SHS10 in the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG.
5: YES → Step 015SHS106 → Step 015SHS107), a variable display corresponding to the special display result (for example, small hit variation) (for example, FIG. 1)
Step 015SHS105 in the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 1-2: NO → the part that executes the step 015SHS108), and the rate at which the corresponding effect is executed is low (for example, steps in the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 11B). 015SHS105
: If YES, step 015 SHS108 is not executed. In the loss variation shown in FIG. 11-6 (M), the decorative pattern 015 executed in the small hit variation shown in FIG. 11-4 (E).
The effect using SH10 is not executed. ).
This makes it difficult to perform a corresponding effect (effect including a decorative symbol) in a variable display (for example, a change in a loss) that does not correspond to the special display result. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the change is a loss change. For this reason, even if a deviation change intervenes between the small hit fluctuation and the small hit fluctuation executed thereafter, it is as if the small hit fluctuation was continuously performed (every change, the small hit is won). As if).
Thereby, even if the winning probability of the small hit is not high (for example, the small hitting probability shown in FIG. 11A:
48%), a light game (a good-tempo, comfortable game) can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a change in the outlier. This allows
From the player's point of view, it seems that small hits have occurred more than they actually are, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling stress due to a change in the loss. Further, since the winning probability of small hits can be suppressed, the base value can be prevented from rising too much without reducing the number of prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the gambling property from being excessively high, and to realize a healthy game.

In the characteristic part 015SH, the game control means performs variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) and variably displays execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 4) for deriving and displaying the display result. (Specifically, step S2 in the CPU 103)
5A and S25B), and the variable display execution means includes first identification information (first
The variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the second identification information (the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 4 (specifically,
The part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the CPU 103), the game control means sets the special state (for example, the small hitting game state) as the game state in which the variable display is executed.
Can be controlled to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) is easily given (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6). Step for performing steps S126 to S128).
Thereby, in the second KT state (during the small hit rush), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the change is a loss change. For this reason, in the second KT state, even if a deviation change intervenes between the small hit fluctuation and the small hit fluctuation executed thereafter, it can be seen as if the small hit fluctuation has been continuously performed. Thereby, even if the winning probability of the small hit is not high (for example, the small hitting probability shown in FIG. 11A: 48%), a light game (a good tempo and a pleasant game) in the second KT state is realized. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a loss change in the second KT state. Further, since the winning probability of the small hit can be suppressed, the base value in the second KT state can be prevented from excessively increasing.

Further, in the characteristic portion 015SH, the effect executing means may correspond to the variable display of the identification information (special symbol), and the decoration identification information (for example, the decorative symbol 015S shown in FIG. 11-4 (E)).
H10) can be variably displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 1 shown in FIG. 8).
20), the reduced decoration identification information (which is different from the variable display of the decoration identification information, corresponding to the variable display of the identification information regardless of whether the special state is controlled or not). For example, the variable display of the second small symbol 015SH12 shown in FIG. 11-4 (E) can be executed (whether the small hit variation shown in FIG. 11-4 (E) or the deviation variation shown in FIG. 11-6 (M)). The second small symbol 015SH12 can be displayed).
Thereby, even when the variation display by the decorative symbol is not performed in the loss variation, the small symbol can be variably displayed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. Therefore, small design (
The player can always grasp the fluctuation state of the special symbol).

Also, in the characteristic portion 015SH, the effect executing means may be configured to execute the corresponding effect (decorative pattern 0 shown in FIG. 11-4 (E)) in a variable display (outlier fluctuation) not corresponding to the special display result.
A specific effect different from the effect including the 15SH10 (specific effect 015 shown in FIG. 11-6 (M))
SH31a) can be executed (for example, a portion for executing step 015SHS106 in the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 11B).
As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the variation has occurred due to the specific effect. In addition, the specific effect executed in the out-of-place fluctuation may be an effect indicating that there is a possibility that a small hit game may be performed thereafter. Therefore, even if a deviation change intervenes between the small hit change and the small hit change executed thereafter, it can be seen as if the small hit change was continuously performed. Thereby, even if the winning probability of the small hit is not high (for example, the small hitting probability shown in FIG. 11A: 48%), a light game (a game with a good tempo) can be realized. In addition, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a loss change.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 015SH, information on the variable display is stored in the hold storage information (hold storage).
Storage means (for example, a game control microcomputer 1 shown in FIG. 5)
00 (specifically, the part that executes step S101A in the CPU 103) and a look-ahead determination that determines whether or not the variable display that has not been started yet is controlled to the special state (for example, the small hitting game state). Means (for example, a portion for executing step S101A in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 5), wherein the effect execution means is a variable which does not correspond to the special display result. In the display (outlier fluctuation), based on the fact that the above-mentioned holding storage means contains the above-mentioned holding storage information (small hit holding) in the special state (for example, by using the look-ahead specific effect setting table shown in FIG. 11-10). ), The specific effect (for example, the specific effect 015SH shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A) to (D)).
31a, 015SH 31b) can be executed.
In this way, it is possible to execute the specific effect of the content according to whether or not the small hit holding is stored in the out-of-office display. For example, a specific performance performed in the outfall fluctuation,
Thereafter, an effect (fixed effect) indicating that the small hitting game is performed may be provided. Therefore, the interest of the specific effect can be improved. In addition, by preparing a plurality of look-ahead specific effects having different degrees of expectation for the small hit game, in the case of continuous loss fluctuations, as the start of the small hit holding fluctuation display approaches, the expectation for the small hit game is gradually increased. A high level of performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can gradually increase the sense of expectation for the small hit game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 015SH, the effect executing means may correspond to the variable display of the identification information (special symbol), and the decoration identification information (for example, the decorative symbol 015S shown in FIG. 11-4 (E)).
H10) can be variably displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 1 shown in FIG. 8).
20), the variable display of the decoration identification information is not displayed in response to the start of the variable display not corresponding to the special display result (for example, FIG. 11-6 (M)).
~ P (P)).
As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the deviation has occurred. For this reason, even if a deviation change intervenes between the small hit fluctuation and the small hit fluctuation executed thereafter, it can be seen as if the small hit fluctuation has been continuously performed.

In the characteristic portion 015SH, a passable state (open state) and a difficult passage state (closed state)
(For example, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the special winning opening shown in FIG. 1), and the variable means can be changed to a passable state in the special state (small hitting game state). The effect executing means can display a special display (for example, the special display 015SH22a in FIG. 11-5 (H)) in response to the game medium passing through the variable means, and can respond to the control of the special state. Then, a predetermined display similar to the special display (for example, the effect image 015SH21a in FIG. 11-5 (G)) is displayed, and in response to the passing of the game medium through the variable means, the display area of the predetermined display is displayed. The special display is displayed by displaying a specific display (for example, an image showing +10 corresponding to the number of payouts in FIG. 11-5 (G)).
Thus, in the small hit game, the effect can be lively regardless of the presence or absence of a prize in the special winning opening. For this reason, by performing the predetermined display, even if there is no winning in the special winning opening, it is possible to make it less noticeable that there is no winning in the special winning opening. Therefore, the player's disappointment when there is no winning in the special winning opening can be reduced. Thus, the predetermined display can suppress a decrease in interest in the small hit game. In addition, when there is a winning in the special winning opening, the number of payouts can be notified by performing a special display, so that the player can be satisfied. Therefore, the special display can enhance the interest in the small hit game. Further, according to the characteristic portion 015SH, it is possible to suppress the winning probability of a small hit, so that the number of award balls can be increased (for example, increased to 15). By increasing the number of prize balls, a specific display having an impact can be provided. Specifically, the payout number corresponding image can be an image indicating “+15”. Therefore, the interest in the small hit game can be improved.

In the characteristic part 015SH, the set value suggestion effect (FIG. 11-11 (
The setting value suggestion effect 015SH41) shown in A) can be executed. That is, in the variable display not corresponding to the special display result, the effect execution means may set any one of a plurality of setting values having different rates at which the advantageous game is executed as the specific effect. Setting value suggestion effect that indicates whether the value is high is executable.
As a result, it is possible to suggest a set value in the out-of-place variation, and it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the out-of-place variation has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a change in the outlier.

In the characteristic portion 015SH, a small hit rush continuation suggestion effect may be executed as the set value suggestive effect during the small hit rush. That is, when the effect is controlled to the special state (the second KT state), the effect execution means includes, as the setting value suggestion effect, a continuation suggestion effect indicating a possibility that the special state is continuously controlled. It may be executable.
As a result, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the small hit rush will be continued, and it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the change is a loss. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a change in the outlier.

Further, in the characteristic portion 015SH, in the small hit variation, after performing an effect (step-up effect) in which the pseudo specific effect is developed in a stepwise manner, it is possible to execute the variation display using the decorative symbol. In other words, the effect execution means, in the variable display corresponding to the special display result, a pseudo specific effect that is the same as or similar to the specific effect (pseudo specific effect 015SH51 shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A) to (D)). After the execution, the corresponding effect can be executed.
Thereby, for example, the variation pattern of 5 seconds (the variation pattern # 33 in FIG. 10-9 (I))
In the selected small hit variation, the sense of expectation for the small hit game can be gradually increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Also, according to the fluctuation pattern, by enabling the execution of the pseudo-specific effect or the look-ahead specific effect, the player can determine whether the pseudo-special effect in the small hit change or the pre-read specific effect in the out-of-place change. Recognition can be made difficult. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize that the change is a loss, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the change in the loss.

Also, in the above description, in the variation of the loss during the small hit rush, the effect by the decorative design (
The configuration in which the corresponding effect is not performed has been described (see FIGS. 11-6 (M) to (P)). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, even in the case of a change in the loss during the small hit rush, an effect indicating the loss (corresponding effect) may be performed depending on the decorative design. For example, out of change
The effect with the decorative design may be performed at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%).
In this way, by intentionally taking the case of notifying the outlier fluctuation, it is possible to make the player aware that the outlier fluctuation may occur. Accordingly, when an effect (for example, a specific effect) that does not positively notify the outlier fluctuation is performed, it is easy for the player to recognize that the outfall fluctuation is not (for example, a small hit fluctuation). can do. As described above, since it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the deviation change may occur, when an effect (for example, a specific effect) that does not actively report the deviation change is performed,
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the change is a deviation.

Also, in the above description, a configuration has been described in which, in the case of the small hit variation, the effect (corresponding effect) using the decorative symbol is always provided to notify that the small hit variation is present (see FIG. 11-4 (E
), (F)). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.
It is possible to perform only the stop display of the decorative symbol (display the decorative symbol at the stop timing) and not to perform the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this case, for example, an effect similar to the specific effect may be performed before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the specific effect performed before one variation of the small hit change may be continuously performed.
Thereby, while clearly notifying that the small hit symbol has stopped, it is not possible to clearly notify that the small hit change is being executed, so it is difficult to distinguish the loss change and the small hit change. can do. Therefore, in the case of a loss variation, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the deviation is a variation.

In the above description, the configuration for performing the specific effect regardless of the type of the small hit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and different specific effects may be executable depending on the type of small hit. Specifically, for example, in the case of the small hit C (open for 1.8 seconds), the look-ahead specific effect that can make the player expect more than in the case of the small hit B (open for 0.8 seconds) (For example, an effect indicating that there is a high possibility that many prize balls are obtained) may be easily performed.
Thereby, the type of the small hit can be suggested in accordance with the content of the look-ahead specific effect, so that the interest of the look-ahead specific effect (the interest of the outlier fluctuation) can be improved.

Further, in the above description, regardless of the number of stored small hits, the prefetching specific effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the loss holding performed before the variable display corresponding to the small hit holding. Was explained. However, in addition to this configuration, different look-ahead specific effects may be performed according to the number of stored small hits. For example, in the order of the variable display, there is a hold memory that is determined to be “missing, small hit” in advance (when the small hit holding is “1”), and in the case of “missing, small hit, small hit”, When there is a determined hold storage (when the small hit hold is “2”), a different look-ahead specific effect may be executable in each outlier change. More specifically, the loss variation when the small hit holding is “2” is larger than the loss fluctuation when the small hit holding is “1”. The effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the small hits are continuous may be easily performed.
This makes it possible to suggest the number of successive small hit games (continuous times) in accordance with the content of the look-ahead specific effect, thereby improving the interest of the look-ahead specific effect (the interest of out-of-place fluctuations). it can.

Further, in the above description, the configuration in which the prefetching specific effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the loss holding performed before the variable display corresponding to the small hit holding has been described.
However, in addition to this configuration, a similar look-ahead identification is also performed in the variable display corresponding to the off-hold performed before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage (big hit hold) determined to be a big hit by the pre-read determination. The effect may be made executable.
Thereby, it is possible to suggest that there is a possibility that a small hit or a big hit may occur due to the specific look-ahead effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the specific look-ahead effect (the interest of the out-of-place variation).
In addition, in the variable display corresponding to the loss hold performed before the variable display corresponding to the big hit hold, an effect different from the specific look-ahead effect when the small hit hold is stored may be performed.
Thereby, depending on the content of the look-ahead specific effect, there is a possibility that a small hit may occur,
Since it is possible to separately indicate that there is a possibility that a big hit may occur, it is possible to improve the interest of the look-ahead specific effect (the interest of the loss fluctuation).

Further, in the variable display corresponding to the loss hold performed before the variable display corresponding to the jackpot hold, a different prefetch specific effect may be performed according to the type of the jackpot determined to be the prefetch for the jackpot hold. Specifically, for example, when a big hit holding indicating a big hit (2R certain changing big hit or 10R certain changing big hit) in which the second KT state continues is stored, the look-ahead specific effect is the same as when the small hit holding is stored. May be performed. Also, in the case of a big hit (6R probability variable big hit) that shifts to the high probability / first KT state, a look-ahead specific effect (for example, An effect that indicates the end of the small hit rush may be performed. In addition, the jackpot (2
In the case of an R regular big hit, a look-ahead specific effect (unfortunate effect) that is less likely to be expected than in the case where a big hit hold indicating a 6R certainty big hit is stored may be performed.
This makes it possible to suggest the type of big hit that may occur in accordance with the content of the specific look-ahead effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the specific look-ahead effect.

In the above description, the configuration in which the pseudo specific effect is stepped up in the small hit variation has been described (see FIGS. 11 to 13). However, in addition to such a configuration, the pseudo-specific effect may be stepped up in a big hit change. For example, in the jackpot fluctuation,
In the case of performing the pseudo specific effect, the pseudo specific effect may be stepped up to a predetermined stage until the middle of the big hit change, similarly to the small hit change, and thereafter, it may be possible to develop into a reach effect.
Accordingly, in the case of the large hit change, the pseudo specific effect (common effect) similar to the small hit change is performed up to the middle of the change display, so that the player can be predicted to have the small hit change until the middle of the change display. Further, after the pseudo specific effect is stepped up, by developing to the reach effect, it is possible to surprise the player who has predicted the small hit fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the big hit fluctuation during the small hit rush.

In the above description, the set value suggestion effect 015 is performed regardless of the number of executions of the small hit game.
The configuration for executing the SH41 has been described (see FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the setting value suggestion effect 015 may be made according to the number of times the small hit game is executed.
SH41 may be executed. Specifically, when the number of executions of the small hitting game reaches a predetermined number such as “10 times” or “20 times”, for example, the set value suggestion effect 015SH41 may be executed in a subsequent loss change. .
Thus, the setting value suggestion effect 015SH41 associated with the number of executions of the small hit game can be performed, so that the setting value suggestion effect 015SH41 can be a valuable effect for the player, and the interest of the small hit rush is improved. be able to.

In addition, a set value suggestion effect 015SH41 having contents corresponding to the number of executions of the small hit game may be executed. Specifically, when the number of times of execution of the small hitting game reaches “10 times”, “20 times”, and “100 times”, for example, in the subsequent fluctuation, a set value suggestion effect 015SH41 having different contents is provided. It may be executable. Set value suggestion effects 01 with different contents
The 5SH41 is, for example, an effect that indicates which of the set values 1 to 6 is more likely, an effect that indicates that the set value is “5” or more, or an actual set value. This is a production suggesting a value close to.
Thereby, the set value suggestion effect 015SH41 of the content related to the number of executions of the small hit game
, The setting value suggestion effect 015SH41 can be a valuable effect for the player, and the interest in the small hit rush can be improved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special design display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10 General winning opening 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning prize ball device 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23… First count switch 24… Second count switch 30… Hitting operation handle 31A… Stick controller 31B… Push button 32… Movable body 41… Pass gate 100… Game control microcomputers 101, 121… ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124: random number circuit 105, 125: I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Effect execution means capable of executing an effect,
With
The game control means is capable of performing a variable display, and controlling to a special state in which a game value can be given when a special display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a corresponding effect corresponding to the variable display, and capable of displaying a special display relating to the special state,
The variable display that does not correspond to the special display result has a lower ratio at which the corresponding effect is executed than the variable display corresponding to the special display result,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

Images